JP2020151192A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase an amusement of a game.SOLUTION: A game machine can perform a game, and comprises performance execution means capable of executing a performance. The performance execution means can execute in a prescribed period, a plurality of kinds of notice performances, and can execute a specific performance for displaying a specific display for specifying a kind of the notice performance to be executed before the prescribed period. A ratio of reporting a content advantageous to a player is different according to a kind of the notice performance to be executed in the prescribed period, sometimes the kind of the notice performance specified by the specific display is executed and sometimes the kind of the notice performance specified by the specific display is not executed after displaying the specific display. There are a plurality of display modes of the specific display, and according to the display mode of the specific display, a ratio of executing the notice performance corresponding to the specific display after displaying the specific display is different depending on the display mode of the specific display.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9-10

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that acquires a plurality of items in response to a button press, displays a plurality of items corresponding to the notice side by side, and executes a notice corresponding to the item (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-116654

However, the interest of the game was insufficient.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.), and the effect can be executed. Means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) are provided, and the effect execution means is within a predetermined period (for example, T15 to T16, T18 to T19, T21 to T22, T24 to shown in FIG. 9-11).
T25, a period before the period in which the lottery is performed with high probability, etc.), multiple types of notice effects (for example, multiple types of notice effects shown in FIG. 9-4) can be executed and executed. A specific effect (for example, a specific effect (for example, a plurality of types of item images shown in FIGS. 9-9 (A) to (L)) that can specify the type of the advance notice effect is displayed before the predetermined period. Figure 9-8 (
The item image effect shown in A) can be executed, and the rate at which the content advantageous to the player is notified differs depending on the type of the advance notice effect executed within the predetermined period (for example,).
(As shown in FIGS. 9-7 (A) to 9-7 (F), the jackpot expectation is different), when the notice effect of the type specified by the specific display is executed after the specific display is displayed. The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEG" that displays the item image when the advance notice effect shown in FIGS. 9-10 (A), (C), (E), and (G) is executed.
When "P2" to "IGEGP5" are determined, after the item image is displayed, the type of advance notice effect specified by the item image is executed, and FIGS. 9-10 (B) (D) (F) (H) show. When the item image effect execution mode patterns "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5" for displaying the item image are determined when the advance notice effect is not executed, the type of advance notice effect specified by the item image is executed after the item image is displayed. There are a plurality of display modes of the specific display (see, for example, FIGS. 9-9 (A) to (L)), and the specific display corresponds to the specific display after the specific display is displayed by the display mode of the specific display. The item image is displayed depending on the display mode of the item image, as shown in FIGS. 9-8 (B) and 9-10 (A) to (H). After that, the rate at which the notice effect corresponding to the item image is executed differs. Specifically, the rate at which the notice effect is executed is such that the display mode of the item image corresponding to the notice effect is the third display mode (level). 3)> The display mode of the item image corresponding to the notice effect is the second display mode (level 2)> The display mode of the item image corresponding to the notice effect is the first display mode (level 1)).

According to such a configuration, the rate at which the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display is executed differs depending on the display mode of the specific display, so that the player pays attention to the display mode of the specific display. , The interest of the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1), the specific display is special corresponding to the execution period of the notice effect corresponding to the specific display (for example, the type of notice effect specified by the specific display). Can be changed to a mode (for example, for item image A, when the cut-in notice effect is executed (T)
15) can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode"), and the special mode of the specific display is common regardless of the type of the specific display (for example, common regardless of the type of the item image). You may.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display is being executed (the item image is used).

(3) In the gaming machines of the above (1) and (2), the specific display is a special aspect after the execution of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display (for example, the notice effect of the type specified by the specific display). Can be changed to (for example, for item image A, at the end of execution of the cut-in notice effect (T)
16) may be changed to "preliminary effect end mode").

According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify that the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display has been executed (the item image has been used).

(4) In the gaming machines (1) to (3), as the specific effect, a plurality of types of the specific display can be displayed within a specific period prior to the predetermined period (for example, in FIG. 9-11). Up to four types of item images can be displayed in T2 to T14 shown), and the specific display of each type may be displayed in any display mode (for example, the scene shown in FIGS. 9-26 (C)). Then, the item image A is displayed in the second display mode (level 2), the item image B is displayed in the second display mode (level 2), and the item image C is displayed in the third display mode (level 3). Item image D is displayed according to the first display mode (level 1)).

According to such a configuration, attention is paid to the display mode of each type of specific display, so that the interest is improved.

(5) The gaming machine according to (2) can execute the advance notice effect at a plurality of timings within the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11, T15, T18, T21, T2
The advance notice effect can be executed at a plurality of execution start timings such as 4, and the execution timing of the advance notice effect differs depending on the type of the advance notice effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-11, the cut The execution start timing of the in-notice effect is T15, the execution start timing of the group advance notice effect is T18, the execution start timing of the button advance notice effect is T21, the execution start timing of the character advance notice effect is T24, and so on, depending on the type of advance notice effect. ), The timing at which the specific display becomes the special mode differs depending on the type of the advance notice effect (for example, the advance notice effect specified by the specific display) corresponding to the specific display (for example, item image A).
Can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode" when the cut-in notice effect is executed (T15), and the item image B can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode" when the group notice effect is executed (T18). The item image C can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode" when the button advance notice effect is executed (T21), and the item image D is the "notice effect execution mode" when the character advance notice effect is executed (T24).
The timing at which the item image becomes the "notice effect execution mode" may differ depending on the type of the advance notice effect specified by the item image).

According to such a configuration, since the execution timing of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display is different, the complexity of the effect can be reduced.

(6) In the game machines (1) to (5) above, when the specific display capable of specifying the type of the advance notice effect is displayed before the execution of the advance notice effect, and when the specific display capable of specifying the type of the advance notice effect is displayed. There are cases where the specific display that can specify the type of the notice effect is not displayed before the execution (for example, FIG. 9-13 (B).
In the example of), the item image B corresponding to the button notice effect is displayed before the button notice effect is executed, but the item image D corresponding to the character notice effect is displayed before the character notice effect is executed. (No), when the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the execution of the advance notice effect, and when the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is not displayed before the execution of the advance notice effect. And, the rate at which the content advantageous to the player is notified differs between, for example, FIG. 9-8 (B).
, As shown in FIGS. 9-10 (A) to 9-10, when the item image corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the execution of the notice effect, and corresponding to the notice effect before the execution of the notice effect. Since the execution rate of the advance notice effect is different from when the item image is not displayed, the item image corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed, and the advance notice effect is supported before the advance notice effect is executed. When the item image to be displayed is not displayed, the jackpot expectation may be different as shown in FIGS. 9-7 (A) to 9-7 (F)).

According to such a configuration, the interest is improved because attention is paid to what kind of production flow will be.

(7) The gaming machines of the above (1) to (6) can change the display mode of the specific display after the display of the specific display (see, for example, FIG. 9-8), and the display mode of the specific display. Effect suggesting change (for example, item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN using item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN, which suggests whether the display mode of item image A changes, which is shown in FIG. 9-17 (C)) May be feasible.

With such a configuration, attention is paid to whether the specific display changes, so that the interest is improved.

(8) The gaming machines according to (1) to (7) above can execute variable display of identification information, and pre-reading determination means (for example, effect control) for pre-reading and determining whether or not content advantageous to the player is notified. The pre-reading notice setting process (step S161), etc. by the CPU 120 is provided, the predetermined period is a period corresponding to a plurality of variable displays, and the specific display is displayed based on the pre-reading determination. May be good. For example, a plurality of item images may be associated with one variable display, or one item image may be associated with each variable display.

With such a configuration, the degree of attention to the fluctuations to be executed later is increased, and the interest is improved.

(9) The game machines (1) to (8) above can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and the disadvantage setting value and the advantageous setting value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. Any setting value can be set from a plurality of setting values including and (see, for example, FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B)), and in at least a part of the above-mentioned advance notice effects of the plurality of types. The set value may be suggested. For example, for a strong cut-in image (Fig. 9-5 (B), etc.), a normal strong cut-in image (appearance of characters A, B, etc.) and a special strong cut-in image (character A, etc.)
, C, etc.), and by providing a setting difference in the determination ratio of the type of strong cut-in image, even if the set value is suggested in the strong cut-in image. Good.

According to such a configuration, in addition to whether the advance notice effect is executed after the display of the specific display, it is also noticed whether there is a suggestion of the set value in the advance notice effect displayed after the display of the specific display. To do.

(10) The gaming machines (1) to (9) above can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and the disadvantage setting value and the advantageous setting value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. Any setting value can be set from a plurality of setting values including and (see, for example, FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B)), and a setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting value can be executed. , The specific display may be displayed in response to the setting suggestion effect to be executed.

With such a configuration, the interest is further improved.

(11) The gaming machines (1) to (9) above can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and the disadvantage setting value and the advantageous setting value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. Any setting value can be set from a plurality of setting values including and (see, for example, FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B)), and a setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting value can be executed. , The specific display may be displayed in response to the advance notice effect to be executed, but may not be displayed in response to the setting suggestion effect to be executed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

(12) The gaming machines (1) to (9) above can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and the disadvantage setting value and the advantageous setting value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. Any setting value can be set from a plurality of setting values including and (see, for example, FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B)), and a setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting value can be executed. , The setting suggestion effect may be executed as the specific display. For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32.
The item image D (level 4) may be used to suggest the set value.

With such a configuration, the interest is further improved.

(13) The gaming machines (1) to (9) above can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and the disadvantage setting value and the advantageous setting value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. Any setting value can be set from a plurality of setting values including and (see, for example, FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B)), and a setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting value can be executed. , The setting suggestion effect may be different from the advance notice effect and the specific display. For example, the set value may be suggested by the effect mode (for example, the background) of the super reach effect, or the set value may be suggested by the start effect (fanfare effect) of the jackpot game state.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each big hit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for detachment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the random value value determination processing at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the cut-in effect determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the cut-in effect determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the cut-in effect determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of an effect pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of an effect pattern. It is explanatory drawing of the production pattern of a cut-in effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio in the pattern CI-3 of a cut-in effect. It is a flowchart which shows the advance notice production decision processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution ratio of the advance notice effect and the determination rate of an effect pattern, and is explanatory drawing of the effect pattern of the advance notice effect. It is explanatory drawing of the notice production execution period for each variation pattern. It is explanatory drawing of the notice production execution period for each variation pattern. It is explanatory drawing of the notice production execution period for each variation pattern. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the advance notice effect in the variable display. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the cut-in effect in the variable display. It is a figure which shows the notification mode of the variable display result for every variation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of the effect pattern in the modification 208SG-1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of the effect pattern in the modification 208SG-2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of the effect pattern in the modification 208SG-3. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the advance notice effect and the determination rate of an effect pattern in a modification 208SG-4. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of the effect pattern in the modification 208SG-5. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of the effect pattern in the modification 208SG-6. It is a figure which shows the execution period of the set value suggestion effect and the execution decision ratio of the set value suggestion effect in the modification 208SG-7. It is a front view of the game machine which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is explanatory drawing explaining the hit probability of the game machine which concerns on a feature part 027SH. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern of the game machine which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is explanatory drawing explaining the advance notice production. This is an example of each notice production. This is an example of each notice production. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination ratio of the advance notice production. It is explanatory drawing explaining the item image production. This is a display example of each item image. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination ratio of the item image production. It is explanatory drawing explaining various timings. This is a specific example of various timings. This is a specific example of various timings. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is explanatory drawing explaining the setting value suggestion in the game machine which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is explanatory drawing explaining the setting value suggestion in the game machine which concerns on the feature part 027SH.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area), a variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. First to do
A special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. Special symbols include numbers indicating "0" to "9" and "
It is represented by a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game,
Variable display of decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, "
The decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction or update display) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative symbol that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, there is a hold display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is held, and a hold display.
A display area for displaying the active display corresponding to the variable display during execution may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of on hold storage. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

In addition, a first hold indicator 25 configured to include a plurality of LEDs at a predetermined position on the game board 2
A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided, the first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the first hold indicator 25B according to the number of LEDs lit. The second reserved memory number is displayed.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example,
It is equipped with an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is close to the winning ball device 6A. It is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second start winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to the device including an electric tulip-type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations below the left and right of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area), the normal symbol display 2
0 is provided. As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passage gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is suspended, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L, 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are located at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3.
Is provided, and a game effect lamp 9 for a game effect is provided in the peripheral portion of the game area. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. )
A hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. Stick controller 31
A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko game machine 1 by the player. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal map game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The general map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol (a symbol that is out of the normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "out of the normal symbol".
Will be. When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7") is used as a confirmed special symbol.
, The actual design differs depending on the jackpot type described later. ) Is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "big hit", and when a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small hit". In addition, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, how to open the big prize opening (
A plurality of types of game states (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) after the big hit game state are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these.
As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big prize opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening (
High open control, high base control) is also executed. The time saving state is a special symbol (especially the second special symbol)
This is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the player is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number cut (time cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is a low accuracy high base state,
The probabilistic state is also called the high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is also called the low-probability low-base state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. In addition, it should be noted
The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a point of the game effect lamp 9. Equal / extinguishing, operation of the movable body 32, etc. may be performed.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol )
Is also stopped and displayed (derived).

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example,"
The same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right".

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (
For example, "6" etc.) may be displayed together as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example,""is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C,
The decorative symbol constituting the chance eye is stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective line in 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state in the same mode as small hit game state) and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach off") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach off"). In addition, when the display result is "off", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss"). The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as "") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "out of reach").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. Besides,
On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, and a solenoid circuit 111.
And so on.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 and a RAM (Random A).
ccess Memory) 102, CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and random number circuit 10
4 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, ROM10
Various data stored in 1 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). Controls (drives) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc.
It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal to be used, a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is
It is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )))
, The game status (for example, the start or end of variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, ROM
Various data (data such as various tables) stored in 121 is used, and RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 includes a controller sensor unit 35A or a push sensor 35.
The display control unit 123 may be instructed to execute the effect based on the detection signal from B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicating the operation content).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) and a CGROM (Character G).
Equipped with an enerator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., the effect is executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the effect image to the image display device 5 based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5.
To display. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or lamp signal (signal that specifies how to turn on / off the lamp)
Is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 has various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects.
Numerical data indicating is counted up to date. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3).
). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (
Step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, C
The PU 103 is an RA that clears the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102.
Perform M clear processing and set the initial value in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), the RAM
It is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.)
In addition, the state of the backup flag and the error detection code are also included. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. RAM1 with backup flag off
If the backup data is not stored in 02 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes),
The CPU 103 checks the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. If it is determined that these match, RAM10
It is determined that the data of 2 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), CP
The U103 performs a restoration process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120
An appropriate screen display may be performed based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (.
Step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, the interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 10 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms).
It is sent to 3 and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 10
First, by executing a predetermined switch process, the detection signal from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 is transmitted via the switch circuit 110. Determining the presence or absence of reception (step S2
1). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22).
). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of times jackpots have occurred) and start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning or the like) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). CPU1
By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, 03 manages the execution and hold of the special symbol game, controls the big hit game state and the small hit game state, controls the game state, and the like (for details, See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26).
). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, C
The PU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process processing, CPU103
First, the start winning determination process is executed (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold memory, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. Each process of the special symbol process process (steps S110 to S120)
), The transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

In the special symbol normal processing in step S110, the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value).
Is executed when. In this special symbol normal processing, the first is based on the presence or absence of pending information.
Whether or not to start the special figure game or the second special figure game is determined. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when it is set as "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or an outlier symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination values to be compared with the random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, the display result is "big hit" or "small hit".
It includes a process of determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types by using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of predetermining whether or not to set. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change process, the process of making settings for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. And the display result is "big hit"
If, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is "8".
If the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening to be open based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like are used as the basis for the big winning opening. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the switch from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is "5".
On the other hand, when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is "
It is updated to 0 ”and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed elapses. here,
When the small hit game state ends, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit) are set. Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73).
). The timer interrupt flag is set for a predetermined time (for example, 2) based on the CTC register setting, for example.
It is set to the on state every time (milliseconds) elapses. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on,
The effect control CPU 120 is automatically set to disable interrupts, but when a CPU that is not automatically disabled is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is turned on in step S73 (step S73; Ye
s), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to turn it off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, the main board 1
After reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of 1 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, settings and controls corresponding to the read effect control commands are performed. It is said. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the RAM 1 may be stored so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like.
The reception flag provided in 22 is turned on. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 may be, for example, a RAM 12
Depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in 2, the following steps S170 to S1
One of the 77 processes is selected and executed.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. Image display device 5
When it is determined to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in, the value of the effect process flag is set to ".
Update to 1 ”and end the variable display start waiting process.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120
By instructing the display control unit 123, the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 can be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, the movable body 32 can be driven, and the voice control board 13 can be driven. Speakers 8L, 8 by the output of the command (sound effect signal) to
During variable display of decorative symbols, such as outputting voice or sound effect from R, and turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 or decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Execute various production controls. After performing such production control
For example, in response to the fact that the end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or the command for specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative symbol is received from the main board 11, etc. The final decorative pattern that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the final decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".
During variable display, the effect processing ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120
For example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state is set, and various effect controls in the small hit game state are executed based on the set content. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. is there"
Update to 5 ”and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120
Sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the big hit game state is terminated. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120
Sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and executes various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

What is displayed during the variable display of a special symbol is one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-").
The variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).
..

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) , Regular Bonus, RT, AT, A
The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of RT and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It may be a form of direct execution using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, the expression (“high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”
Expressions such as "low" and "differentiate") may include that one is in the proportion of "0%". For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".
(Explanation of feature section 208SG)

Next, with respect to the gaming machine in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, FIGS. 8-1 to 8-27.
Will be described with reference to.

First, FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-3, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into an outer frame 208SG00 formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape.
It is composed of 1a, a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface, and a game machine frame (underframe) 208SG003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, the gaming machine frame 208SG003 has a glass door frame 208 having a glass window.
SG003a is rotatably provided between a door opening position that opens the front surface of the game machine frame 208SG003 and a door closing position that closes the front surface, centering on the left side, and the glass door frame 208S.
The game area can be opened and closed by G003a, and the glass door frame 208SG003
When a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the game machine frame 208SG003 can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the game machine clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and the game machine frame 208 for players other than the clerk or the like.
The SG003 and the glass door frame 208SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 208SG002L is a game area in which a game ball launched relatively weakly (left-handed) by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 208SG002R
Is a game ball launched (right-handed) stronger than the game ball flowing down the left game area 208SG002L by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle 30, and the upper path 208SG0 of the image display device 5
It is a game area that passes through 02C and flows down.

Further, a general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 208SG002L, and in the right game area 208SG002R, a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general winning ball device 6B are arranged from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 208SG002R. A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 208SG002L can win a prize in the first starting winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 208SG002R is variable. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10, and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is possible to pass through the passing gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 208SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, the left game area 20
The game ball flowing down the 8SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening or the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 208SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening.

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the main board 11 in the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment is a board case 208SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member.
It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being stored in. Further, on the main board 11,
Lock switch 2 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state
08SG051, the setting changeover switch 208SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing the setting value such as the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the set value change state, and the opening that detects the opening of the game machine frame 208SG003. The sensor 208SG090 and the like are provided. The set value change state in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment is a state in which a clerk of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state).
But also.

The setting switching main body unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the lock switch 208SG051 and the setting changeover switch 208SG052 is housed in the board case 208SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 208SG051 and the setting changeover switch 208SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the board case 208SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 208SG201.

Since the board case 208SG201 having the lock switch 208SG051 and the setting changeover switch 208SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming machine frame 20
The operation is extremely difficult when the 8SG003 is closed, and the operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 208SG003 using a predetermined door key. Also, lock switch 208SG
Since 051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the 051. Further, the lock switch 208SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later by a setting key. In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys is illustrated, but these may be shared by one key.

Further, in the substrate case 208SG201, a display monitor 208SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is arranged. The display monitor 208SG029 is a main board 1
It is connected to 1 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case 208SG201. That is, the display monitor 208SG029 is the main board 11 in the board case 208SG201.
It is placed in front of you when you see. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 208SG003 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 208SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognized, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 208SG, the lock switch 2 is used when the power is turned on.
If the 08SG051 and the open sensor 208SG09 are ON, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 208SG029 as the set value change state. At this time,
Display monitor 208SG029 by operating the setting selector switch 208SG052
The numerical value (set value) displayed in can be updated and displayed.

Then, by turning off the lock switch 208SG051 while an arbitrary numerical value from 1 to 6 is displayed on the display monitor 208SG029, the display monitor 208SG029 is turned off.
The value displayed in is set as a new setting value. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the CPU 103 sends a setting value designation command described later to the effect control board 12 regardless of whether or not a new setting value is set (set). By doing this
The effect control CPU 120 can specify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the set value designation command.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a predetermined position (for example, a lower left position of the gaming area) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment. 1 First special symbol display device 208SG004A capable of variable display of 1 special figure, 2nd special symbol display device 208SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special figure, 1st hold display capable of displaying 1st hold storage number Device 208SG025A, 2nd hold display 208 capable of displaying the 2nd hold storage number
SG025B, normal symbol display 208SG020 that can execute variable display of normal symbol, normal figure hold display 208SG025C that can display the number of normal figure hold storage, round number (big hit type) of the big hit game can be displayed during the big hit game Round display 208SG131, right-handed lamp 208SG132 that lights up in the game state where a game ball such as a high base state (time saving state) or a big hit game state is launched toward the right game area 208SG002R, and a probability change lamp 208SG133 that lights up in the probability change state. A game information display unit 208SG200 is provided in which the time-saving lamps 208SG134 that light up in the high base state (time-saving state) are collectively arranged.

1st special symbol display device 208SG004A and 2nd special symbol display device 208SG004B
Each consists of 8-segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A and the second special symbol display device 208SG004B, if the variable display result of the special symbol is out of place or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

In the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 208SG004A has two types of big hit symbols (lighting L) for each big hit type.
Variable display results and derivation display are possible with the combination of ED). Further, in the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 20
The 8SG004B can derive and display a variable display result with two types of jackpot symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each jackpot type.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the first special symbol display device 208SG0
The jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the 04A and the second special symbol display device 208SG004B are all different, but the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 208SG004A and the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 208SG004B can be derived and displayed. At least a part of the big hit symbol may be duplicated.

In the first hold indicator 208SG025A and the second hold indicator 208SG025B, LEDs of four segments are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. These first hold indicators 2
In 08SG025A and the second hold indicator 208SG025B, if the number of hold storage is one, only the LED at the left end lights up, and each time the number of hold storage increases, it is the second from the left and the third from the left.
The third and fourth LEDs from the left are turned on in sequence. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the hold memory is reduced (consumed), and the LE on the hold display corresponding to the variable display is used.
D turns off in a predetermined shift direction (to the left in the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment).

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure holding storage is preferentially executed. It has become like. Therefore, for example, when there is one 1st special figure holding memory and 2 2nd special figure holding storages (only the LED at the left end of the 1st holding indicator 208SG025A is lit and the 2nd holding is held. When the two LEDs on the left of the display 208SG25B are lit)
Is executed after the number of the second special figure hold memory becomes 0 by the execution of the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory, and then the variable display based on the first special figure hold memory is executed.

Further, the round display 208SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). As the jackpot types in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A which is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B which is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C which is a 15-round jackpot. Therefore, which segment of the segments constituting the round display 208SG131 is lit differs depending on the jackpot type.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs and the like are included.

It should be noted that the effect control board 12 in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment has the first movable body 208SG321 and the second movable body 208SG321 that can operate between the origin position and the effect position during variable display and the like.
The movable body 208SG322 and the first movable body 208SG321 are the first movable body 208SG32.
Origin detection sensor 208SG331 that can detect that it is located at the origin position of 1, and the second
An origin detection sensor 208SG332 that can detect that the movable body 208SG322 is located at the origin position of the second movable body 208SG322 is connected.

FIG. 8-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 208SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 8-4 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first special symbol display device 20.
This is the first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in 8SG004A. Command 8002H is the second special symbol display device 208.
This is the second variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. still,
In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the command 8C0
0H is the first variable display result designation command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. Command 8C02H has a variable display result of "big hit" and a big hit type of "big hit".
This is the third variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result of "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time reduction control is performed (the game state (low base state, normal state)).
This is the second game state specification command corresponding to the high base state and time saving state).

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormal) and the type of the error (abnormal) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Error (abnormal)
With the specified command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is possible to specify which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.
The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 208SG004B has been satisfied.
It is a start opening prize designation command.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. Command C
The 2XXH is a second display device 5 or the like for identifiable display of the number of reserved special figures.
This is the second hold storage number notification command for notifying the special figure hold storage number. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are the first start condition and the second hold storage number notification command.
When any of the start conditions is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the transmission may be performed in response to the start of execution of the special figure game.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (commands for designating a winning determination result) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" and the judgment result of the big hit type (probability change, non-probability change, or sudden change) as the judgment result at the time of winning. Also, the command C6XXH is
As a winning determination result, it is a variation category command indicating a determination result of which variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" is the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern.

The command D0XXH transfers the newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (
This is a setting value designation command for designating the effect control CPU 120).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and is a ROM that stores a game control program, fixed data, and the like.
(Read Only Memory) 101 and a RAM (Random A) that provides a work area for game control.
ccess Memory) 102 and a CPU (Ce) that executes a game control program to perform control operations.
The ntral Processing Unit) 103, the random number circuit 104 that updates the numerical data indicating the random number value independently of the CPU 103, the I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and the real-time clock (RTC) that can output time information. ) 106.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 is the ROM 10
By executing the program read from No. 1, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. Variable data read operation, CPU 103 I
A reception operation that receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via / O105, a transmission operation that the CPU 103 outputs various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the like. Will be done.

FIG. 8-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11.
As shown in FIG. 8-5, in the feature unit 208SG of this embodiment, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern on the main board 11 side. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determination, the random value MR4 for determining the display result of the general map, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random values MR1-
The MR5 may be counted by software update using a different random counter in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In the present embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 8-5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each random value is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 8-6 shows the fluctuation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to each of the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. Display result is "big hit"
A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to such a case. Further, 1 variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a “small hit”.
The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The variable display result is "
The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case of "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach in which a super reach effect such as super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, and super reach δ is executed. There is a fluctuation pattern. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, the super reach variation pattern may be provided with 5 or more super reach variation patterns.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment, the super reach fluctuation patterns, super reach α and super reach β, are shown. , Super reach γ, and super reach δ are set shorter. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach production of the super reach such as super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, and super reach δ in the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment is executed, the super reach The special figure fluctuation pattern is set longer in the order of δ, super reach γ, super reach β, and super reach α.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set to be "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, so that the big hit expectation is set to be high. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

However, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as a fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ, the variable display result is notified that the variable display result is a big hit after once notifying that the variable display result is out of order as the reach effect of the super reach γ. A variation pattern (PB1-5 shown in FIG. 8-6) for executing the revival effect is provided. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ that executes the revival effect is set to have a longer special figure fluctuation time than the normal fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ and a shorter special figure fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ. However, it is an exceptionally high fluctuation pattern (100%) with the highest expectation of big hits.

In addition, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into, for example, a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, and the like. Rather than determining the variation patterns to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation patterns belonging to the determined type after determining them first, only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern type is provided to determine these fluctuations. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value for determining the pattern type, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the fluctuation content (effect content) is predetermined for each fluctuation pattern, but the present invention illustrates this. The variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value, even if the variation pattern is the same. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 out of normal reach, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. As a fluctuation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach out of reach, when the set value is 3, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to make a fluctuation pattern that is out of super reach.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as a work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Also, CPU10
In No. 3, all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side can be generated by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-7 to 8-14, which are prepared by the CPU 103 for performing various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8, and the second special figure display result determination shown in FIGS. 8-9 and 8-10. Table, jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), FIG. 8-11
In addition to the big hit type judgment table (for the second special symbol) shown in (B), the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table, the small hit fluctuation pattern judgment table, the out-of-order fluctuation pattern judgment table, the normal figure display result judgment table (not shown), and the normal Figure A variation pattern determination table (not shown) is included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. In other words, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the amusement park side. Become.

8-7 to 8-10 are explanatory views showing a display result determination table. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. Feature part 208 of this embodiment
In SG, as the display result determination table, individual display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special figure and the second special figure The display result determination table common to the two special figures may be used.

In FIG. 8-7 (A), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the display result determination table for the first special figure,
Of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094. Is assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

FIG. 8-7 (B) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the probability variation state (high accuracy and high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, 1020 of the hit judgment values which are numerical values which can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment.
~ 1346 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-7 (C), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 2, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the display result determination table for the first special figure,
Of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1253 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094. Is assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

FIG. 8-7 (D) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 2, and the gaming state is the probability variation state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, 1020 of the hit judgment values which are numerical values which can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment.
~ 1383 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-7 (E), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 3, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the display result determination table for the first special figure,
Of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1272 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094. Is assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

FIG. 8-7 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 3, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). Display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, 1020 of the hit judgment values which are numerical values which can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment.
~ 1429 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-8 (A), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the display result determination table for the first special figure,
Of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094. Is assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

FIG. 8-8 (B) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the probability variation state (high accuracy and high base state). Display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, 1020 of the hit judgment values which are numerical values which can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment.
~ 1487 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33049 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-8 (C), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 5, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the display result determination table for the first special figure,
Of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094. Is assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

FIG. 8-8 (D) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 5, and the gaming state is the probability variation state (high probability high base state). Display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, 1020 of the hit judgment values which are numerical values which can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment.
~ 1556 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-8 (E), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 6, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the display result determination table for the first special figure,
Of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094. Is assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

FIG. 8-8 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 6, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). Display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, 1020 of the hit judgment values which are numerical values which can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment.
~ 1674 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-9 (A), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected in a certain case. In the display result determination table for the second special figure,
Of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421. Is assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

FIG. 8-9 (B) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). Display result judgment table. In the second special figure display result judgment table, 1020 of the hit judgment values which are numerical values which can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment.
~ 1346 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 is assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-9 (C), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 2, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the display result determination table for the second special figure,
Of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, up to 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421. Is assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

FIG. 8-9 (D) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 2, and the gaming state is the probability variation state (high accuracy and high base state). Display result judgment table. In the second special figure display result judgment table, 1020 of the hit judgment values which are numerical values which can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment.
~ 1383 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 is assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-9 (E), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 3, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected in a certain case. In the display result determination table for the second special figure,
Of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1272 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421. Is assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

FIG. 8-9 (F) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 3, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). Display result judgment table. In the second special figure display result judgment table, 1020 of the hit judgment values which are numerical values which can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment.
~ 1429 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-10 (A), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1292 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

FIG. 8-10 (B) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). Display result judgment table. In the second special figure display result judgment table, 102 of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment.
0 to 1487 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "big hits".
It is assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-10 (C), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 5, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020-1317 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

FIG. 8-10 (D) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 5, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). Display result judgment table. In the second special figure display result judgment table, 102 of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment.
0 to 1556 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "big hits".
It is assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-10 (E), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 6, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 8-10 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 6, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, 102 of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment.
0 to 1674 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "big hits".
It is assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

As described above, in each display result judgment table, the game state is a probability change state (high probability state).
When is, more judgment values are assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" than in the normal state or the time saving state. As a result, in the probabilistic state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 performs probabilistic change control, the special figure display result is "big hit" in the normal state or the time saving state.
Probability of being determined to be controlled to the jackpot game state (in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, and 3 when the set value is 3). Is 1/260, 1/240 when the set value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, 1/200 when the set value is 6, the special figure display result is "big hit". (In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, when the set value is 1, 1/200, when the set value is 2, 1/180, and the set value is high, the probability of being determined to be controlled to the jackpot game state is high. In the case of 3, 1/160
, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state, the probability that it is determined to control the jackpot gaming state is higher than in the normal state or the time saving state. , The determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-7 to 8-10, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is different according to each set value. Different (for example, if the set value is 1, the probability variation of the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability variation with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times. The jackpot probability multiplier in the state is about 1.56 times, and if the set value is 3, the jackpot probability multiplier in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value is constant (for example).
It may be set to 5 times).

Further, in each of the first special figure display result determination tables, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8, in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the small hit game state is 1/200
Is set to.

On the other hand, in each of the second special figure display result determination tables, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the first regardless of the game state or the set value.
Judgment values are assigned so that they have the same value as the display result judgment table for special figures. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-9 and 8-10, in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the small hit game state is set to 1/100.

It should be noted that the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is the same regardless of the set value. The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be different depending on the set value. Further, the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" and the small hit gaming state is different according to the variable special map. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be the same probability regardless of the variable special figure.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to the "big hit" and "small hit" in each display result judgment table, the display result for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the determination table, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit").
In the case of the set value 2 to the set value 6, 12 so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.
The numerical range corresponding to each set value from 38 is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.
The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, 0 to 0
Of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 65535, the common numerical range (1020 to 1237)
) Is assigned to "Big hit", but if the set value is 2 or more, the number in the range of the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range is "" It is assigned to "big hit". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range is 1 as the value of the set value increases.
It will increase based on 238.

Therefore, the jackpot probability uses 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value).
As the set value increases, the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases, and the value increases.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 3276 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6.
Since it is set in the range of 7 to 33094, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit").
In the case of the set value 2 to the set value 6, 13 so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.
The numerical range corresponding to each set value from 47 is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.
The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability uses 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value).
As the set value increases, the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases, and the value increases.

In the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is in the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is in the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1 of the hit determination values is described as described above.
While 020 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, the small hit judgment value is 32767 in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Is the reference value of the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value), 32767 ~
Since it is set in the range of 33094, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit").
In the case of the set value 2 to the set value 6, 12 so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.
The numerical range corresponding to each set value from 38 is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.
The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, 0 to 0
Of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 65535, the common numerical range (1020 to 1237)
) Is assigned to "Big hit", but if the set value is 2 or more, the number in the range of the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range is "" It is assigned to "big hit". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range is 1 as the value of the set value increases.
It will increase based on 238.

Therefore, the jackpot probability uses 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value).
As the set value increases, the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases, and the value increases.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 3276 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6.
Since it is set in the range of 7 to 33421, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit").
In the case of the set value 2 to the set value 6, 13 so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.
The numerical range corresponding to each set value from 47 is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.
The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the big hit judgment values are not included in the common numerical range. Numerical values within the range including the common numerical value range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability uses 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value).
As the set value increases, the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases, and the value increases.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1 of the hit determination values is described as described above.
While 020 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, the small hit judgment value is 32767 in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Is the reference value of the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value), 32767 ~
Since it is set in the range of 33421, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set based on the hit determination value 1020. The judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the continuous numerical range of 1 is based on the hit judgment value 32767 regardless of the game state and the set value (common). The variable display result is judged by using the judgment value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit judgment value.

Further, in each of these display result judgment tables, when the fluctuation special figures are the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is Same). In addition, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is 655.
On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, there is a probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the "big hit". Judgment values are assigned so that the lower the value and the larger the value of the set value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as "big hit" (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5> Set value 4> Set value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1).

That is, when the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time and the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot,
It is decided to make a big hit (big hit A to big hit C) for a special symbol. Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 8-7 to 8-10 indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, but the first special symbol display device 208SG00
It is also to determine whether or not the stop symbol in the 4A or the second special symbol display device 208SG004B is a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 208SG004A or the second special symbol display device 208SG004B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, a total of 6 set values of 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

8-11 (A) and 8-11 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 8-11 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first starting winning opening (that is, when the first special symbol is variably displayed). It is a table when you do. Further, FIG. 8-11 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second starting winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is variably displayed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 8-12. In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, the jackpot A (which shifts to the low accuracy high base state by executing only the time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state
A non-probability change jackpot) and a jackpot B and a jackpot C (also referred to as a probability variation jackpot) in which high-accuracy control and time-saving control are executed after the end of the jackpot game to shift to the high-accuracy high-base state are set.

The big hit game state by "big hit A" is a normally open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state which is advantageous for the player five times (so-called 5 rounds) and is repeatedly executed. The jackpot game state by "B" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Figure Ends when the game is in a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot B or the jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is the big hit B or the big hit C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs in.

In the feature section 208SG of the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is 2. There may be less than one type, or four or more types.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 99 of the MR2 determination value ranges 0 to 299 are assigned to jackpot A. 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), the MR2 determination value ranges from 0 to 299.
0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. That is, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the winning opening in which the game ball has won is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. , The jackpot type is determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is not limited to this. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the variable display result to "big hit" and the variable display result to be "small hit". The jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is determined in advance and the deviation pattern judgment table used when it is decided in advance that the variable display result is "off" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), the super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3), and the revival effect are executed. Not Super Reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-4), Super Reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-5) to execute revival effect, Super Reach δ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-6) On the other hand, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-13 (A), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table, 1 to 50 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are normal reach jackpot variation patterns (PB1). -1) is assigned, 51 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 201 to 400 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). Assigned, 401-
Super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-4) that does not perform revival production up to 650
), And 651 to 700 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot (PB1-5) that executes the revival effect, and 701 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot (PB1-). It is assigned to 6).

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the fluctuation pattern for big hits is determined by using the fluctuation pattern determination table of 1, that is, the pachinko. Although the embodiment in which the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern is the same when the variable display result is a big hit regardless of the set value set in the game machine 1, the present invention is not limited to this. , The determination ratio of each fluctuation pattern may be different for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for small hits, the fluctuation pattern of small hits (PC1)
A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of -1). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-13 (B), in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, the range of determination values of MR3 is 0 to 9.
Of the 97, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit fluctuation pattern (PC1-1). As a variation pattern of small hits in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, PC1
Although only -1 is provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more fluctuation patterns may be provided as the fluctuation pattern of the small hit.

Further, the deviation pattern determination table includes the deviation pattern determination table A used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control, and the low base. The deviation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and the deviation variation used when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for deviation used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed are prepared in advance.

In the out-of-reach variation pattern determination table A, the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, the normal reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α out-of-range variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super Random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is taken for the fluctuation pattern of reach β off (PA2-3), the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ off (PA2-4), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach δ off (PA2-5). A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value in the possible range.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (A), in the deviation pattern determination table A (for low-base medium total hold storage number 1 or less), 1 to 4 of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3.
Up to 50 are assigned to non-reach out-of-reach variation patterns (PA1-1), 451
~ 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-normal fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 851 to 930 are assigned to the super reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2). Fluctuation pattern of β off (PA2
It is assigned to -3), and 931 to 970 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ out of line (PA2-4), and 971 to 997 are assigned to the change pattern of out of super reach δ (PA2-5). Assigned.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super Fluctuation pattern of reach α off (PA2-2),
Fluctuation pattern of super reach β out of order (PA2-3) Random value MR3 for determining fluctuation pattern is taken for fluctuation pattern of out of super reach γ (PA2-4) and fluctuation pattern of out of super reach δ (PA2-5). A predetermined random number value is assigned as a judgment value in the possible range.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (B), in the deviation pattern determination table B (for 2 to 4 low-base medium total pending storage numbers), 1 to 1 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997. 5
Up to 00 is assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), 501
~ 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-normal fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 851 to 930 are assigned to the super reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2). Fluctuation pattern of β off (PA2
It is assigned to -3), and 931 to 970 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ out of line (PA2-4), and 971 to 997 are assigned to the change pattern of out of super reach δ (PA2-5). Assigned.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super Fluctuation pattern of reach α off (PA2-2),
The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is calculated for the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β out of line (PA2-3), the fluctuation pattern of the out of super reach γ (PA2-4), and the fluctuation pattern of the out of super reach δ (PS2-5). A predetermined random number value out of the possible range is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (C), in the deviation pattern determination table C (for low-base medium total pending storage number of 5 or more), 1 to 5 out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997.
Up to 50 are assigned to non-reach out-of-reach variation patterns (PA1-3), 551.
~ 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-normal fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 851 to 930 are assigned to the super reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2). Fluctuation pattern of β off (PA2
It is assigned to -3), and 931 to 970 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ out of line (PA2-4), and 971 to 997 are assigned to the change pattern of out of super reach δ (PA2-5). Assigned.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the shortening non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4) and the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4) corresponding to the time reduction control are performed.
PA2-1), fluctuation pattern of super reach α out of line (PA2-2), change pattern of out of super reach β (PA2-3), change pattern of out of super reach γ (PA2)
2-4), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-5) out of the super reach δ.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (D), in the deviation pattern determination table D (for high base medium), 1 to 550 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are non-reach deviation variations. It is assigned to the pattern (PA1-4), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2). Is assigned to 851
~ 930 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β, 931 to 970 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of super reach γ, and 971 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4). Fluctuation pattern of super reach δ off (PA
It is assigned to 2-5).

As described above, when the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio for determining the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern is set higher than the ratio for determining the super reach variation pattern. In addition, the variation pattern determination tables A to D for disconnection
When is used, regardless of the fluctuation pattern judgment table, 701 to 850 are the fluctuation patterns of the super reach α out of line, 851 to 930 are the fluctuation patterns of the super reach β out of line, and 931 to 970 are the super reach γ. Outlier fluctuation pattern, 9
71 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation patterns of the super reach δ deviation, that is, when the variable display result is the deviation, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined by a common determination ratio, so that the fluctuation of the super reach It is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered because the variable display by the pattern is not executed.

In the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment, as the deviation pattern, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α deviation, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β deviation, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ deviation, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ deviation Although the respective determination ratios exemplify the completely same form between the set values, the present invention is not limited to this, and these fluctuation patterns of the super reach α deviation and the fluctuation of the super reach β deviation are illustrated. The determination ratios of the pattern, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ deviation, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ deviation may be different for each set value.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. If the variable display result is out of order, the determination ratios of all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, and
Only the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of either the non-reach or the normal reach may be the same.

The fluctuation time of the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and further, the fluctuation pattern (PA1-2).
The fluctuation time of the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) is shorter than that of (Fig. 8-6).
reference). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By winning a start when the player is in the game, it becomes difficult for a useless start-up prize that is not stored on hold to occur, and when the number of stored memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long and the non-reach is out of reach. By determining the pattern (PA1-1),
By lengthening the variable display time, it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the variable display not being executed.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 (A) to 8-14 (C), variations are made using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the total number of reserved storages. Although the form of determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first The variation pattern may be determined using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the number of reserved memory of the special symbol and the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which there is a one-to-one correspondence between whether or not to execute the reach effect and which reach effect is to be executed for each determined fluctuation pattern. The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach effect based on the special figure variation time of the variation pattern, the variable display result, and the like.
You may decide which reach effect to execute by lottery.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8-1 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure holding storage unit, a second special drawing holding storage unit, a normal drawing holding storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter. It has a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

The first special figure reservation storage unit is a special figure in which the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but has not yet started. game(
The reserved data of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (detection order of game balls) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and satisfies the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value M for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on
Numerical data indicating R3 is used as reserved data, and the number of stored data is a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"
Remember until you reach). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and a starting winning (second starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 208SG004B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and satisfies the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on , The number is a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"
Remember until you reach). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 208SG020 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the game ball passes through the gate 41 in the normal drawing hold storage unit.
The numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball is used as the hold data in association with the hold number in the order of passing. Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can update the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example
The game control counter setting unit stores data indicating count values for each of the plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and periodically according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated targetly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random count circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Further, the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit.

There are a plurality of types of effect control flag setting units that can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In addition, the data constituting the start winning command buffer at the time of winning is stored in the predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit. The command buffer received at the time of starting winning is a storage area (buffer number "1-") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage.
An area corresponding to "1" to "1-4") and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure during variable display (area corresponding to the buffer number "1-0") are provided. Further, in the start winning command buffer, the storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage is stored. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display are provided.
When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command) or the hold memory number notification command ( Commands such as the first hold storage number notification command or the second hold storage number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the 1st special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the 2nd special figure hold storage in the received command buffer at the time of starting winning associate these commands, and the 1st special figure hold storage and the 2nd special figure hold storage. Figure A storage area (entry) for storing separately from the hold storage is secured.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) are stored when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started.
As will be described later, they are shifted up one by one.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the received command buffer at the time of starting winning. At the time of starting prize at the 2nd starting prize opening
The command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the command buffer received at the time of starting winning. At the time of starting prize
From the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are transmitted in sequence. Therefore, when the command is received, each command is stored in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. I will go.

Next, the process executed by the CPU 103 in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-15 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. In the start winning prize determination process, as shown in FIG. 8-15, the CPU 103 first has a first start port switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A.
It is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is ON based on the detection signal from (2).
08SGS501a). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (208S)
GS501a; Y), whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit stored number). (208SGS502). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit. When the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is not the upper limit value (208SGS502; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit is set to "1" (208SGS503).

When the first start port switch 22A is off at 208SGS501a or (208SG)
S501a; N), when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value (208SGS502; Y) in 208SGS502, a second starting winning opening provided by the variable winning ball device 6B is provided. 2 It is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is ON based on the detection signal from the start port switch 22B (208SGS501b). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (208SGS501b; Y), the second special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (. For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is "4") (208SGS505). CPU 103
For example, the second stored value of the second reserved storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit.
It suffices if the second special figure holding memory number can be specified by reading the hold storage number count value.
When the second special figure reserved memory number is not the upper limit value in 208SGS505 (208SGS5)
05; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit is set to "
2 ”(208SGS506).

When the second start port switch is not on (208SGS501b; N) or when the second special figure reserved storage number is the upper limit value (208SGS505; Y), the start winning determination process ends.

After executing any of the processes of 208SGS503 and 208SGS506, the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the storage value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (208SGS507). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first
While the hold storage count value is added by 1, when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (208SGS508). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit, can be set.
It may be updated so that 1 is added.

After executing the process of 208SGS508, the CPU 103 uses the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is extracted (208SGS509). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (208SGS510).
). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the random number value M is stored in the first special figure hold storage unit.
While the numerical data indicating R1 to MR3 is stored, when the start port buffer value is "2", the numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit.

The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. The CPU 103 executes the process of 208SGS509, thereby
Numerical data indicating all of the random value values used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol and the variable display time is extracted.

Following the processing of the 208SGS510, the transmission setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (208SGS 511). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the ROM
By storing the storage address of the second start opening prize designation command table in 101 in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, the setting for transmitting the second start opening prize designation command to the effect control board 12 is made. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

Following the processing of 208SGS511, the random number value determination processing at the time of winning is executed (208SGS).
512). After that, for example, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. (208SGS513). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

After executing the process of 208SGS513, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (208SGS514). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (2)
08SGS514; Y) After clearing the start port buffer and initializing the stored value to "0" (208SGS515), the process proceeds to 208SGS501b. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2"(208SGS514; N), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (208SGS516), and then the start winning determination process To finish. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

8-16 (A) shows the 208SGS512 of FIG. 8-15 as the winning random number value determination process.
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process executed in. In this feature unit 208SG
When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, in the special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 5), the game state, the special symbol for executing the variable display, and the display result determination table (figure) according to the set value. 8-7 to 8-10) is selected, and whether or not to control the special figure display result (variable display result of the special symbol) as a "big hit" in the big hit gaming state using the selected display result determination table. Judgment and whether or not to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is performed.

On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination processing of the 208SGS512 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). Therefore, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. Do. As a result, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, at the start of the variable display. The special figure display result is "big hit" before
And "small hit", and which category the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is in the variable display mode is determined, and based on this determination result, the effect control CPU 120 or the like is used as described later. Pre-reading notice effects such as hold display notice effects will be executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 8-16 (A), the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit 208SG152, and the pachinko game. Identify the current gaming state on machine 1 (2)
08SGS521). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probability change state (high probability high base state) when the probability change flag is on, and is in the time saving state (low probability high base state) when the probability change flag is off and the time saving flag is on. When both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are off, it is sufficient to specify that the normal state (low probability low base state).

Following the processing of the 208SGS521, the CPU 103 specifies a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (208SGS522). Next, the display result determination table according to the current game state, start port buffer value, and set value is selected and set (208SGS52).
4).

Specifically, when the start port buffer value is "1", the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is for the first special drawing shown in FIG. 8-7 (A). When the display result judgment table is set and the set value is 1 and the game state is the probability change state, FIG. 8-7 (B).
When the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8 is set and the set value is 2 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the first special figure display result shown in FIG. 8-7 (C) is displayed. When the judgment table is set and the set value is 2 and the game state is the probability change state, the display result judgment table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-7 (D) is set and the set value is 3. When the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-7 (E) is set, and the set value is 3 and the game state is the probability change state. Sets the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-7 (F).

Further, when the start port buffer value is "1", the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination for the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-8 (A) is determined. When the table is set and the set value is 4 and the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-8 (B) is set, and the set value is 5 and When the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-8 (C) is set, and when the set value is 5 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state. When the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-8 (D) is set and the set value is 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is shown in FIG. 8-8 (E). When the display result determination table for the first special figure is set and the set value is 6 and the gaming state is the probability change state, the first is shown in FIG. 8-8 (F).
Set the display result judgment table for special figures.

Further, when the start port buffer value is "2", the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-9 (A) is determined. When the table is set and the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-9 (B) is set, and the set value is 2 and When the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-9 (C) is set, and when the set value is 2 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state. When the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-9 (D) is set and the set value is 3 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is shown in FIG. 8-9 (E). When the display result determination table for the second special figure is set and the set value is 3 and the gaming state is the probability change state, the second is shown in FIG. 8-9 (F).
Set the display result judgment table for special figures.

Further, when the start port buffer value is "2", the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-10 (A) is determined. When the table is set and the set value is 4 and the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-10 (B) is set, and the set value is 5 and When the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-10 (C) is set, and when the set value is 5 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state. FIG. 8-10 (D)
When the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8 is set and the set value is 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the second special figure display result shown in FIG. 8-10 (E) is displayed. When the judgment table is set and the set value is 6 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state, FIG. 8-10 (F).
) Is set for the display result judgment table for the second special figure.

After setting the display result judgment table, the variable display result judgment module (208SGS)
In 525), a process of determining whether the special figure display result is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “missing” is performed. In the variable display result judgment module, the numerical range of the big hit judgment value or the small hit judgment value in the set variable display result judgment table is compared with the value of the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, and the disorder is described. If the value of the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, the variable display result is judged as a big hit, and if the value of the random value MR1 is within the numerical range of the small hit judgment value, the variable display result is judged as a small hit. Then, if the value of the random number value MR1 is outside the numerical range of the big hit determination value and outside the numerical range of the small hit determination value, the variable display result may be determined to be out of range.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the 208SGS525 determines that the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS526). When it is judged that it will not be a big hit (20)
8SGS526; N) determines whether or not the 208SGS525 determines that the variable display result is a small hit (208SGS527). When it is determined that the hit is not a small hit, that is, when it is determined that the variable display is out of alignment (208SGS527; N),
The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "missing", is executed (208SGS527a), and whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, the current game state is set. Judging whether or not the time is shortened (208SGS528)
..

When the time saving flag is not set (208SGS528; N), the deviation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 8-14 is selected and set, and the process proceeds to 208SGS536 (208SGS529). When the time saving flag is set. Is (208SGS528;
Y), the deviation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 8-14 (D) is selected and set, and the process proceeds to 208SGS536 (208SGS530).

When it is determined by 208SGS526 that the variable display is a big hit (208SGS5)
26; Y), based on the random value MR2 for jackpot type determination and the jackpot type determination table.
The jackpot type is determined (208 SGS 533). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that composes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

In addition, a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second symbol designation command when the jackpot is A, a third symbol designation command when the jackpot is B, and a fourth symbol when the jackpot is C. Execute the transmission setting of the symbol specification command (208SGS534), and then
As a table for determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-13 (A) is selected and set (208SGS535), and 208SGS.
Proceed to 536.

In addition, when it is determined by 208SGS527 that a small hit is obtained in the variable display, (2).
08SGS527; Y), the transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "small hit", is executed (208SGS531), and FIG. 8-13.
Select and set the variation pattern determination table for small hits shown in (B) (208SGS5).
32), proceed to 208SGS536.

In the feature unit 208SG, in the deviation pattern determination table A to the deviation variation pattern determination table D, determination values of 1 to 700 are commonly assigned to the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern of super reach is assigned to 701 to 997.

Therefore, if the variable display result is out of alignment, the outlier variation pattern determination table A
Alternatively, by determining the variation pattern using the deviation pattern determination table D, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always a non-reach or super reach variation pattern even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination. Therefore, in the determination at the time of starting winning, the variation pattern is determined using the deviation pattern determination table A or the deviation pattern determination table D.

208SGS529, 208SGS530, 208SGS532, 208SGS535
After executing any of the processes of, each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for the variation pattern determination are used.
Judge the variation category according to the range of judgment values including the random value MR3 (208SGS5)
36). In this feature unit 208SG, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (B), when at least the variable display result is “out of”, the variable display mode of “non-reach” is common regardless of the total number of reserved storages. Variable category, variable display mode of "super reach", variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit), and "other" variable category. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not the variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, after making a setting for transmitting the variation category designation command according to the determination result by the processing of 208SGS536 to the effect control board 12 (208SGS537).
, Ends the random value judgment process at the time of winning.

The symbol designation command and the variable category designation command are transmitted when the CPU 103 executes a command control process.

Next, the process executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-17 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) shown in FIG. 7.

In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is set (208SGS271). 1st
When the variable display start command reception flag is set (208SGS271; Y)
, 1st special figure hold storage buffer number "1-0" in the command buffer received at the time of starting winning
The various command data and various flags stored in association with "1-4" are shifted upward by one buffer number (S272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is not set in the 208SGS271 (208SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is set (208SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is not set (208SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display 2 start command reception flag is set (208).
SGS273; Y), various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer are buffer numbers. It shifts up one by one (208SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

After executing 208SGS272 or 208SGS274, the effect control CPU 120
Fluctuation pattern specification command Read the variation pattern specification command from the storage area (208S)
GS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (208SGS).
276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. To do.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, when the received display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot A, for example, as a stop symbol, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are even numbers is arranged. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). When the received display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the jackpot B, for example, as a stop symbol, a decorative symbol in which 3 symbols are arranged in odd numbers other than "7" and "3" Combination (big hit design)
To decide. Then, when the received display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the jackpot C, for example, a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are aligned with "7" or "3" as stop symbols (big hit). Design) is decided. If the received display result specification command is the fifth variable table uncle result specification command indicating a small hit, for example, "123" or "2".
A combination of three consecutive numbers such as "46" and three consecutive even (or odd) decorative symbols (small hit symbols) is determined. Then, the first display result specification command received indicates that the command is off.
In the case of the variable display result specification command, for example, a combination of decorative symbols (missing symbols) different from the above-mentioned large hit symbol and small hit symbol is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a stop symbol determination table in which random numbers for determining the stop symbols are extracted and data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

After executing 208SGS276, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of super reach (208SG277). Whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a fluctuation pattern of super reach is determined by 208SG2.
It may be specified from the variation pattern specification command read in 75. When the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a fluctuation pattern of super reach (208SG277; Y),
During the reach effect, the cut-in effect determination process (208 SGS278) for determining whether or not to execute the cut-in effect described later and the effect pattern of the cut-in effect is executed 208.
Proceed to SGS279. Further, when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is not the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (208SG277; N), 20 without executing the process of 208SGS278.
Proceed to 8SGS279.

Then, in the 208SGS279, the effect control CPU 120 executes a advance notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the advance notice effect described later in the variable display and the effect pattern of the advance notice effect (208SGS279). The notice production is shown in FIGS. 8-27 to 8-2.
As shown in 9, the non-reach variable pattern is an effect that can be executed during the variable display, and the normal reach and super reach variable patterns are the effects that can be executed during the period from the start of the variable display to the timing of reaching. Is.

After the execution of 208SGS279, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command (208SGS280). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (208SGS281).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like are each process data n.
They are arranged in chronological order in association with (1 to N).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the content of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1).
, Lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1), and an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, various lamps as an effect component, and a speaker 8L as an effect component, 8R, control of the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (208SGS282). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 208SG in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. May select the variation pattern to be used from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern specification command.

Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time (variable display time) specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is set in the fluctuation time timer (208SGS283). In addition, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (208SGS284). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Every time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image according to the signal to realize variable display of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (
208SGS285).

8-18 to 8-20 are flowcharts showing the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-17. In the cut-in effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern of super reach α or super reach β (208SGS301). Fluctuation pattern is Super Reach α or Super Reach β
When the fluctuation pattern is (208SGS301; Y), the cut-in effect determination process is completed, and when the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach γ or super reach δ (208 SGS 301; N), the fluctuation pattern is further super reach. It is determined whether or not it is a fluctuation pattern of γ (208SGS302).

When the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ (208SGS301; Y
) Determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-5, that is, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ that executes the revival effect (208SGS303). When the fluctuation pattern is PB1-5 (208SGS303; Y), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the jackpot type (208SGS304) and determines whether or not the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS305). ..

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS305; Y), whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS306), and 208SGS308. Proceed to. In addition, 208
In SGS306, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (A), the cut-in effect is not executed 10 based on the fluctuation pattern being PB1-5 and the variable display result (big hit type) being jackpot A or jackpot B. Determined at a rate of%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 55%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 5%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

The cut-in effect in the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment is shown in FIGS. 8-28 and 8.
As shown in −31, the image of the push button 31B is displayed on the image display device 5 during the reach effect of the super reach γ, and the player is urged to operate the push button 31B. When the push button 31B is operated during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends without the push button 31B being operated, each effect is displayed on the image display device 5. Display effects and cut-in images according to the pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 and 8-31, the effect pattern is pattern CI-.
If it is 1, the cut-in image 208SG005w is displayed with the blue effect on the image display device 5, and if the effect pattern is pattern CI-2, the cut-in image 208SG005x is displayed with the red effect on the image display device 5. If the effect pattern is pattern CI-3, the cut-in image 208SG005y is displayed together with the golden effect on the image display device 5, and if the effect pattern is pattern CI-4, the cut-in image 208SG005z is displayed on the image display device 5 as a rainbow. Display with color effects.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS305; N), the effect control CP
The U120 determines whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect pattern based on the jackpot type being the jackpot C (208SGS307), and proceeds to 208SGS308. In addition, 20
In 8SGS307, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (A), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is performed based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern is PB1-5 and the variable display result (big hit type) is big hit C.
Determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 54%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 5%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 1%.

After executing 208SGS306 or 208SGS307, the effect control CPU 120
It is determined whether or not the execution of the cut-in effect is decided (208SGS308). When the execution of the cut-in effect is decided (208SGS308; Y), the determined effect pattern is stored and a value corresponding to the period until the start of the cut-in effect is set in the cut-in effect start waiting timer (208SGS309, 208SGS310). ), The cut-in effect determination process is completed.

Further, in the 208SGS303, when the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 or PB1-4) of the super reach γ that does not execute the revival effect (208SGS303;
N), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (N).
208SGS311), it is determined whether or not the specified set value is any of 1 to 3 (
208SGS312). The set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the CPU 103.
It may be specified based on the setting value specification command received from.

When the execution of the cut-in effect is determined in the cut-in effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the cut-in effect start waiting timer by -1 each time the variable display effect process (S172) is executed. When the timer for waiting for the start of the cut-in effect has timed out, the process table for the cut-in effect is set according to the determined effect pattern. After that, each time the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display, the effect control device (image display device 5) follows the contents of the data (process data) in the cut-in effect process table.
, Speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.), and the cut-in effect may be executed.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3 (208SG)
S312; Y) further determines whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (308SGS3).
13). Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit may be determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-4, which is a super reach γ big hit. When the variable display result is a big hit (2)
08SGS313; Y) identifies the jackpot type (208SGS314) and determines whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS315).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS3315; Y), the cut-in effect is executed based on the setting value being any one of 1 to 3 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. Determine the presence / absence and production pattern (208SGS3316)
), The processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, 208SGS31
In No. 6, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (B), the cut-in effect is produced based on the fact that the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result (big hit type) is big hit A or big hit B. Non-execution is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is set to 30.
Pattern CI-1 was determined at a rate of%, pattern CI-2 was determined at a rate of 50%, and 10
The percentage is determined to be pattern CI-3, and the percentage is determined to be pattern CI-4.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS315; N), the effect control CP
The U120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the set value being one of 1 to 3 and the jackpot type being the jackpot C (208SGS317).
, 208SGS308-208SGS310 are executed. In addition, 208SGS317
Then, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (B), the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result (
Based on the fact that the jackpot type) is jackpot C, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the variable display result is out of order in 208SGS313 (208SGS31).
3; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the fact that the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is out of order (208SGS318). ), The processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In 208SGS318, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (B), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is 55 based on the fact that the set value is any of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is out of order.
Determined at a rate of%. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 35%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 0%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 208SGS312 are 4 to 6.
(208SGS312; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4 (208SGS221).
.. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4 (208SGS321; Y)
Further determines whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS322). Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit depends on whether the fluctuation pattern is a super reach γ big hit PB1-
It suffices to determine whether or not it is 4.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS322; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS323), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS324).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS324; Y), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the setting value being 4 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. (208SGS325), 208SGS3
The processing of 08 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, in 208SGS325, FIG. 8-21
As shown in (C), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 4 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS324; N), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the setting value of 4 and the jackpot type being jackpot C (the jack-in effect is executed). 208SGS326), 208SGS308-208SGS31
Execute the process of 0. In 208SGS326, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (C), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 4 and the jackpot type being jackpot C. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the variable display result is out of order in 208SGS322 (208SGS32)
2; N) further determines whether or not the gaming state is a high-accuracy high-base state (208SGS3).
27). The game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103.

When the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state (208SGS327; Y), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 4, the variable display result is out of order, and the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state. Determine whether or not to execute the in-effect and the production pattern (208SGS328)
), The processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, 208SGS32
In No. 8, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (C), the cut-in effect is produced based on the fact that the set value is 4, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the high-accuracy high-base state. The non-execution of is determined at a rate of 40%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is set to 3.
Pattern CI-1 was determined at a rate of 0%, and pattern CI-2 was determined at a rate of 10%, and 2
The pattern CI-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, and the pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the gaming state is a low accuracy high base state or a low accuracy low base state (208 SGS).
327; N) indicates whether or not the cut-in effect is executed based on the fact that the set value is 4, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the low accuracy high base state or the low accuracy low base state. And the production pattern is determined (208SGS329), 208SGS308-208
The process of SGS310 is executed. In 208SGS329, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (C), the set value is 4, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the low accuracy high base state or the low accuracy low base state. Based on that, 5 non-execution of cut-in production
Determined at a rate of 9%. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 1%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 208SGS321 is not 4 (208SGS321; N), whether or not the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5 in the effect control CPU 120. Is determined (208SGS330). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5 (208SGS330; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS331). Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit may be determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-4, which is a super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS331; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS332), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS333).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS333; Y), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the setting value being 5 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. (208SGS334), 208SGS3
The processing of 08 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, in 208SGS334, FIG. 8-21
As shown in (D), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 5 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS333; N), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the setting value of 5 and the jackpot type being jackpot C ( 208SGS335), 208SGS308-208SGS31
Execute the process of 0. In 208SGS335, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (D), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 5 and the jackpot type being jackpot C. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the variable display result is out of order in 208SGS331 (208SGS33).
1; N) further determines whether or not the gaming state is a high-accuracy high-base state (208SGS3).
36). The game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103.

When the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state (208SGS336; Y), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 5, the variable display result is out of order, and the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state. Determine whether or not to execute the in-effect and the production pattern (208SGS337)
), The processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, 208SGS33
In No. 7, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (D), the cut-in effect is produced based on the fact that the set value is 5, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state. The non-execution of is determined at a rate of 35%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is set to 3.
Pattern CI-1 was determined at a rate of 0%, and pattern CI-2 was determined at a rate of 10%, and 2
The pattern CI-3 is determined at a rate of 5%, and the pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the gaming state is a low accuracy high base state or a low accuracy low base state (208 SGS).
336; N) indicates whether or not the cut-in effect is executed based on the fact that the set value is 5, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the low accuracy high base state or the low accuracy low base state. And the production pattern is determined (208SGS338), 208SGS308-208
The process of SGS310 is executed. In 208SGS338, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (D), the set value is 5, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the low accuracy high base state or the low accuracy low base state. Based on that, 5 non-execution of cut-in production
Determined at a rate of 8%. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 2%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 208SGS330 is not 5 (208SGS330; N), the effect control CPU 120 is variable, assuming that the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6. It is determined whether or not the display result is a big hit (208SGS339). Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit may be determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-4, which is a super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS339; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS340), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS341).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS341; Y), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the setting value of 6 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. (208SGS342), 208SGS3
The processing of 08 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, in 208SGS342, FIG. 8-21
As shown in (E), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the set value of 6 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS341; N), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the setting value of 6 and the jackpot type being jackpot C (the jack-in effect is executed). 208SGS343), 208SGS308-208SGS31
Execute the process of 0. In 208SGS343, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (E), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 6 and the jackpot type of jackpot C. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the variable display result is out of order in 208SGS339 (208SGS33).
9; N) further determines whether or not the gaming state is a high-accuracy high-base state (208SGS3).
44). The game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103.

When the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state (208SGS344; Y), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 6, the variable display result is out of order, and the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state. Determine whether or not to execute the in-effect and the production pattern (208SGS345)
), The processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In addition, 208SGS34
In No. 5, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (E), the cut-in effect is produced based on the fact that the set value is 6, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the high-accuracy high-base state. The non-execution of is determined at a rate of 30%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is set to 3.
Pattern CI-1 was determined at a rate of 0%, and pattern CI-2 was determined at a rate of 10%, and 3
The pattern CI-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, and the pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the gaming state is a low accuracy high base state or a low accuracy low base state (208 SGS).
344; N) indicates whether or not the cut-in effect is executed based on the fact that the set value is 6, the variable display result is out of order, and the gaming state is the low accuracy high base state or the low accuracy low base state. And the production pattern is determined (208SGS346), 208SGS308-208
The process of SGS310 is executed. In 208SGS346, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (E), the set value is 6, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the low probability high base state or the low probability low base state. Based on that, 5 non-execution of cut-in production
Determined at a rate of 7%. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 3%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ (PS2-5 or PB1-6) in the 208SGS302 (202SGS302; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS351). .. Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit may be determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-4, which is a super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS351; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS352), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS353).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS353; Y), whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS354), and 208SGS308. ~ 208SGS31
Execute the process of 0. In 208SGS354, as shown in FIG. 8-22, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS353; N), the presence or absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the jackpot type being jackpot C (20SGS353; N).
208SGS355), 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS355, as shown in FIG. 8-22, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the jackpot type being jackpot C. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

In addition, when the variable display result is out of order in 208SGS351 (208SGS35)
1; N) determines whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect pattern based on the fact that the variable display result is out of alignment (208SGS356), and 208SGS308 to 208SGS3.
10 processes are executed. In 208SGS356, as shown in FIG. 8-22, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 35% based on the fact that the variable display result is out of alignment. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is changed to the pattern CI- at a rate of 30%.
Determined to be 1, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, pattern CI- at a rate of 25%
It is determined to be 3, and the pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-21 and 8-22, when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ or the super reach δ, the cut-in is performed. When the effect is not executed, the ratio of the variable display result to the big hit (big hit expectation) is the lowest, and when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-1, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-2. In this case, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit increases in the order of the case where the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-4. (Expected jackpot in cut-in effect: non-execution <pattern CI-1 <pattern CI-2 <pattern CI-3 <pattern CI-4).

In particular, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-4, the variable display result becomes a big hit and the big hit type is a big hit C regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.
It is confirmed that

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-21, 8-22, and 8-24, the cut-in effect is set to the pattern C when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ and the super reach δ.
Regarding the ratio to be executed in I-3, when the set value is any of 1 to 3 and the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach γ and out of super reach δ, it is set to the lowest (0%). Then, when the fluctuation pattern is a super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect, the fluctuation pattern does not execute the revival effect when the set value is any of 1 to 3-per reach γ jackpot.
In the case of a super reach δ jackpot, the set value is 4 and the fluctuation pattern does not execute the revival effect. In the case of a super reach γ jackpot, the set value is 5 and the fluctuation pattern does not execute the revival effect. In the case, the cut-in effect is applied in the order of the case where the set value is 6 and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect.
It is set so that the ratio of execution in 3 is increased.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ (PA2) in which the fluctuation pattern does not execute the revival effect.
Focusing on -4 and PB1-4), when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1 to 3, the variable display result is obtained when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3. Is determined to be a big hit (any of big hit A to big hit C), while when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4 to 6, the cut-in effect is pattern CI-.
Even if it is executed in step 3, the variable display result may be out of order. That is, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, the cut-in is higher than when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3. The jackpot expectation when the effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 is set low. Therefore, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, when the reach effect of the super reach γ is executed and the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is out of order, the pachinko gaming machine 1 It is confirmed that the set value set in is one of 4 to 6.

On the other hand, paying attention to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot (PB1-5) that executes the revival effect, the cut-in effect is the pattern CI-3 rather than the fluctuation pattern (PB1-4) of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect. And the rate of execution in pattern CI-4 is set low. For this reason, in the case where the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect, the cut-in effect is executed by CI-3 and the deviation is notified, so that the pachinko gaming machine Even though the player recognizes that the set value set to 1 is one of 4 to 6, the revival effect is executed later and the pachinko is notified that it is a big hit. The set value set for the game machine 1 is 4 to
It is suppressed that the player is discouraged because it is uncertain whether or not it is any of 6.

Further, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ (PA2-4 and PB1-) in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6 and the fluctuation pattern does not execute the revival effect.
When paying attention to 4), when the variable display result is a big hit, the ratio of the cut-in effect being executed in the pattern CI-3 is set to be the same in all the set values, but the variable display In the case where the result is out of order, the higher the set value, the higher the ratio of the cut-in effect being executed in the pattern CI-3 is set (when the set values are 4 to 6, the pattern CI-3 is executed at the time of out of order). Ratio: Set value 4 <Set value 5 <Set value 6).

Therefore, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the higher the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3, and the variable display result is out of order. Since the frequency of occurrence increases, the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4.
It is possible to expect the player to be one of the above 6 and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ (PA2-4 and PB1-) in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6 and the fluctuation pattern does not execute the revival effect.
In the case of 4), if the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same and the variable display result is different, the gaming state is high accuracy and the gaming state is low accuracy in the place where the high base state is present. The cut-in effect is pattern C at a higher rate than in the high base state or low probability low base state.
It is set to run on I-3.

Therefore, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 in the variable display in the high accuracy and high base state, and the variable display result is out of order, so that the gaming state is low accuracy. Even after shifting to the low base state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to any of 4 to 6 to encourage the player to continue the game, so that the gaming interest can be improved. ing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-21 (B) to 8-21 (E), paying attention to the case where the variable display result is out of alignment, the higher the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the higher the cut-in. The execution rate of the production is set high. That is, in this feature unit 208SG, the ratio of the cut-in effect being executed when the variable display result is out of alignment is 4 for the pachinko gaming machine 1.
Since it is suggested that any of the setting values of ~ 6 is set, the cut-in effect is executed in addition to whether or not the cut-in effect is executed in the effect pattern with high expectation of big hit. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the cut-in effect shown in FIGS. 8-21 and 8-22 is only an example, and the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the cut-in effect is determined according to the gaming machine to which the present invention is applied. It may be different from the feature unit 208SG as appropriate. However, when the determination ratios of the effect patterns of these cut-in effects are appropriately different, the tendency of the jackpot expectation of each effect pattern (big hit expectation in the cut-in effect: non-execution <pattern CI-1 <pattern CI-2). By maintaining the <Pattern CI-3 <Pattern CI-4) itself, the player does not misunderstand the jackpot expectation according to the production pattern of the cut-in effect when executing the cut-in effect. Is desirable.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-21 and 8-22, when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ or the super reach δ, the variable display is executed.
An example is illustrated in which the ratio of executing the cut-in effect during the variable display is different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the variable display result, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, when the variable display is executed by the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ or the super reach δ, the cut-in effect may be always executed during the variable display. In the case where the cut-in effect is always executed during the variable display of the super reach γ and the super reach δ, if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, When the variable display result is out of alignment, the ratio assigned to non-execution of the cut-in effect (see FIGS. 8-21 (C) to 8-21 (E)) is the pattern CI with a low expectation of big hit.
By assigning to 1 or both the pattern CI-1 and the pattern CI-2, the ratio at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 may be maintained so as not to be different from the feature unit 208SG. By doing so, the cut-in effect is excessively executed in the pattern CI-3 while improving the interest by executing the cut-in effect during the variable display of the super reach γ and the super reach δ. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily recognizing that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6.

FIG. 8-25 is a flowchart showing the advance notice effect determination process in FIG. 8-17. In the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (208SGS361). Then, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is a small hit (208SGS362). When the variable display result is a small hit (208SGS362; Y
) Ends the advance notice effect determination process, and the variable display result is a big hit or a miss (208)
SGS362; N) further determines whether or not the execution of the cut-in effect is determined, that is,
Judge whether or not any of the cut-in effects patterns is stored (208S)
GS363).

When the execution of the cut-in effect is determined (208SGS363; Y), the stored cut-in effect effect pattern is pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4.
It is determined whether or not (208SGS364). When the effect pattern of the stored cut-in effect is pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 (208SGS364;
Y) determines whether or not the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-4, and whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect pattern based on the specified variable display result and the variable pattern (208SGS365). ).

On the other hand, when it is decided not to execute the cut-in effect (208SGS363; N) or when the stored effect pattern is the pattern CI-1 or CI-2 (208SGS3).
64; N) determines whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS366).
When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS366; Y), specify the big hit type (
208SGS367), the presence or absence of execution of the advance notice effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the specified jackpot type (208SGS368).

Further, when the variable display result is out of alignment (208SGS366; N), the presence / absence of execution of the advance notice effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the specified variable display result and the variation pattern (2).
08SGS369).

Specifically, in the processing of 208SGS365, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 15%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 55%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. If the variable display result is out of alignment and the variation pattern is super reach (out of super reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 50%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is changed to the pattern YE- at a rate of 30%.
Determined to be 1, pattern YE-2 at a rate of 20%, pattern YE-3 at a rate of 0%
Is determined, and the pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the variable display result is out of alignment and the fluctuation pattern is normal reach (out of normal reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 80%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 15%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the variable display result is out of reach and the fluctuation pattern is non-reach (non-reach out of reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 5%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 0%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the case where the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is out of order is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. This is a case where the set value is any of 4 to 6 and the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ deviation (PA2-4).

As shown in FIGS. 8-26 (C) and 8-30, the pattern YE-1 is the image display device 5.
Is an effect pattern for displaying the image 208SG005s of the character A together with the blue effect, and the pattern YE-2 is the image 20 of the character B on the image display device 5.
This is an effect pattern that displays 8SG005t together with a red effect, and is a pattern YE-.
Reference numeral 3 denotes an effect pattern for displaying the image 208SG005u of the character C together with the golden effect on the image display device 5, and the pattern YE-4 displays the collective image 208SG005v of the characters A to C together with the rainbow color effect on the image display device 5. This is the effect pattern to be displayed.

Further, in the processing of 208SGS368, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (B), when the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%.
Pattern YE-2 was determined at a rate of 45%, pattern YE-3 was determined at a rate of 15%, and
The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. If the jackpot type is jackpot C,
The non-execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 10%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 40%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 15%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

Further, in the processing of 208SGS369, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (B), when the variable display result is out of alignment and the fluctuation pattern is super reach (out of super reach),
The non-execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 50%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 15%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 5%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Also,
Further, when the variable display result is out of alignment and the variation pattern is normal reach (out of normal reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 80%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 15%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the variable display result is out of reach and the fluctuation pattern is non-reach (non-reach out of reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 5%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 0%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the ratio (big hit expectation degree) at which the variable display result becomes the big hit is set to be the lowest when the notice effect is not executed during the variable display, and the notice effect is a pattern. Variable display in the order of execution in YE-1, the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-2, the advance notice effect is executed in YE-3, and the advance notice effect is executed in YE-4. The rate at which the result is a big hit is set to be high (expectation of big hit of notice effect: not execute notice effect <execute in pattern YE-1 <execute in pattern YE-2 <execute in pattern YE-3 <pattern Executed with YE-4).

In particular, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (B), when the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined or the cut-in effect is lower than the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-4, the pattern CI- When the execution in 1 or the pattern CI-2 is decided, the advance notice effect may be executed in the pattern YE-4 only when the jackpot type is the jackpot C. Therefore, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in addition to whether or not the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-3, the game also determines whether or not the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-4. It is possible to draw people's attention.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), as the effect pattern of the cut-in effect, the pattern CI-3, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the pattern CI-1 and the pattern CI-2, or the variable display result is a big hit. Pattern C that confirms that the jackpot type is jackpot C
When I-4 is determined, it is set so that YE-3 and YE-4 are not executed as the effect pattern of the advance notice effect regardless of the variable display result and the variation pattern. Therefore, when the variable display result is a big hit, the cut-in effect can be executed only by the pattern YE-1 and the pattern YE-2, so that the variable display result is a big hit, which is the start of the cut-in effect. It is prevented that the player recognizes the timing before the timing (the start timing of the advance notice effect). Furthermore, when the variable display result is out of alignment, neither the advance notice effect nor the cut-in effect is executed in an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, so that the player is excessively opposed to the variable display result being a big hit. It is prevented from expecting.

After executing any of the processes of 208SGS365, 208SGS368, and 208SGS369, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the advance notice effect is determined (2).
08SGS370). When it is decided to execute the advance notice effect (208SGS370; Y), the effect pattern determined by any of the processes of 208SGS365, 208SGS368, and 208SGS369 is stored (208SGS371), and the advance notice effect start waiting timer is set to give a notice. The effect determination process is completed (208 SGS 372). If it is decided not to execute the advance notice effect (208SGS370; N), 208SGS371, 208SGS
The notice effect determination process is terminated without executing the process of 372.

When it is decided to execute the advance notice effect in the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 12
0 sets the value of the timer for waiting for the start of the warning effect to be − each time the variable display effect processing (S172) is executed.
If the timer for waiting for the start of the advance notice effect has timed out, the process table for the advance notice effect is set according to the determined effect pattern. After that, the effect control CPU 120
By controlling the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) according to the contents of the data (process data) in the advance notice effect process table each time the effect process during variable display is executed. The notice production may be executed.

As described above, by making it possible to determine the execution of the cut-in effect and the advance notice effect within the variable display start setting process, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 (A) to 8-27 (C), non-reach In the out-of-range fluctuation pattern, the advance notice effect can be executed only in the pattern YE-1 during the variable display, and in the normal reach out-of-reach variation pattern, the advance notice effect is performed in the period before the reach during the variable display in the pattern YE-. It is possible to execute with 1 and pattern YE-2, and in the fluctuation pattern of super reach α off and super reach β off, the advance notice effect is given in the period before reach during variable display pattern YE-1 to pattern YE-. 3
It is possible to execute with. It should be noted that the cut-in effect cannot be executed in the period after the reach in the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach deviation, the super reach α deviation, and the super reach γ deviation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-28, in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ deviation and the super reach δ deviation, the advance notice effect can be executed by the patterns YE-1 to YE-3 in the period before the reach. In the period after the reach, the cut-in effect can be executed by the patterns CI-1 to pattern CI-3. However, if the cut-in effect is decided to be executed in the pattern CI-3, the advance notice effect is the pattern YE-1 and the pattern YE.
It can be executed only with -2.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-29 (A) and 8-29 (B), in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect, the advance notice effect is performed in the period before the reach YE-1 to 1. It can be executed by the pattern YE-4, and the cut-in effect can be executed by the patterns CI-1 to the pattern CI-4 in the period after the reach. However, when the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-4, the advance notice effect can be executed only in the pattern YE-1 and the pattern YE-2.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 at the time of executing the variable display in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-30 to 8-32. First, FIGS. 8-30 (A) to
As shown in FIG. 8-30 (E), when the execution of the advance notice effect is determined at the start of the variable display, the advance notice effect is set to any of patterns YE-1 to YE-4 in the image display device 5. Will be executed. Specifically, when the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-1, the image 208SG005s of the character A is displayed together with the blue effect on the image display device 5, and the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-2. When the image 208SG005t of the character B is displayed together with the red effect on the image display device 5 and the advance notice effect is executed by the pattern YE-3, the image 208SG of the character C is displayed on the image display device 5.
When 005u is displayed together with the golden effect and the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-4, the group image 208SG005v of the characters A to C is displayed together with the rainbow color effect on the image display device 5.

At this time, the player can use the image 2 of any character whose image displayed on the image display device 5 is
It is possible to recognize the jackpot expectation by which of 08SG005s, 208SG005t, 208SG005u, and 208SG005v and the color of the effect displayed together with the image of these characters.

As described above, when the cut-in effect is determined to be executed by the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-4 at the start of the variable display, the advance notice effect is the pattern YE-1 or the pattern Y.
It can be executed only with E-2.

Then, when the variable display is a variable display of super reach γ, FIG. 8-31 (A)
~ As shown in Fig. 8-31 (C), after the decorative design is displayed as a combination of reach, the reach effect of Super Reach γ (in this feature section 208SG, the battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character fight) is executed. To.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-31 (D), when the cut-in effect execution start timing during the reach effect of the super reach γ is reached, the image display device 5 starts displaying the image of the push button 31B, and the player A promotion notification is performed to urge the user to operate the push button 31B. At this time, the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, or the player operates the push button 31B without operating the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. When the reception period elapses, the effect is displayed on the image display device 5 together with the cut-in image corresponding to the effect pattern of the cut-in effect.

Specifically, when the effect pattern of the cut-in effect is pattern CI-1
When the cut-in image 208SG005w is displayed with the blue effect on the image display device 5 and the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-2, the cut-in image 208SG005x is displayed with the red effect on the image display device 5 and cut. When the in-effect is executed by the pattern CI-3, the cut-in image 20 is displayed on the image display device 5.
When 8SG005y is displayed together with the golden effect and the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-4, the cut-in image 208SG005z is displayed together with the rainbow-colored effect on the image display device 5.

At this time, the player can see which of the cut-in images 208SG005w, 208SG005x, 208SG005y, 208SG00 is the cut-in image displayed on the image display device 5.
It is possible to recognize the jackpot expectation by which of 5z and the color of the effect displayed together with these cut-in images.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 8-32 (A) and 8-32 (B), when the variation pattern of the variable display is PS2-4 (fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ out of line), the super reach γ As a reach effect result (battle effect result), when the ally character loses to the enemy character, it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, and the variable display ends. Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-32 (A) and 8-32 (C), when the variable display variation pattern is PB1-4 (super reach γ jackpot variation pattern that does not execute the revival effect). , As the reach effect result (battle effect result) of the super reach γ, when the ally character wins the enemy character, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit, and the variable display ends.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-32 (A) and 8-32 (D) to 8-32 (F), the variation pattern of the variable display is PB1-5 (super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect). In the case of (variation pattern), it is notified that the variable display result is once out of order due to the defeat of the ally character by the enemy character as the reach effect result (battle effect result) of the super reach γ. Then, when the revival effect is executed, it is notified again that the variable display result is a big hit when the ally character reverses to the enemy character and wins as the reach effect result (battle effect result) of the super reach γ. The variable display ends.

Although not shown in particular, when the variable display is a variable display of super reach δ,
After the decorative pattern is displayed as a combination of reach, a battle effect in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight in the same manner as the reach effect of Super Reach γ) is executed. Then, when the cut-in effect is executed during the battle effect, the variable display result is always a big hit by executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3. The battle production as the reach production of Super Reach δ may be the same as the battle production as the reach production of Super Reach γ, but the characters to be played against and the development of the battle are partially different. You may.

As described above, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-21, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the cut-in effect is the pattern CI. While it is confirmed that the variable display result will be a big hit by executing in -3, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, the cut-in effect is performed. There is a case where the variable display result is out of order when executed in the pattern CI-3. That is, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is out of order, it is determined that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. , When the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the player can pay attention to whether the variable display result is a big hit or a miss, and the game interest can be improved. There is.

In addition, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-21, after notifying that the variable display result is out of order as a variable pattern in which the cut-in effect can be executed during the reach effect. Super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern (super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern that executes resurrection effect, PB1-5) and super reach that does not execute resurrection effect to notify that the variable display result is a jackpot by executing the resurrection effect A fluctuation pattern of γ jackpot (PB1-4) is provided, and when variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect, the fluctuation of super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect. The ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 is set lower than that in the case of executing the variable display in the pattern. Therefore, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ and it is notified that the variable display is out of order, the player sets the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Even if it recognizes that is any of 4 to 6, the revival effect is executed and the variable display is notified that it is a big hit.
It is possible to reduce a decrease in the interest in the game due to an error in recognizing that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the disadvantage setting values are set to 1 to 3 and the advantageous setting values are set to 4 to 6 as the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the setting values are set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The determination ratio of the effect pattern of the cut-in effect or the advance notice effect is different depending on whether the set value is the disadvantageous set value or the advantageous set value, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as the disadvantage setting value includes 1 and the advantage setting value includes 6, they may be set in any range in which the values do not overlap with each other. Specifically, the disadvantage setting value may be 1 to 5 and the advantage setting value may be only 6, or the disadvantage setting value may be only 1 and the advantage setting value may be 2 to 6.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, an embodiment in which the suggestion effect in the present invention is described as a reach effect is illustrated, but the invention is not limited to this, and the suggestion effect in the present invention is being variably displayed. As long as it is an effect that can be executed, for example, an effect other than the reach effect may be used, such as a pseudo continuous effect in which a temporary stop of a decorative symbol and a revariable display are repeatedly executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-21 (C) to 8-21 (E), the fluctuation of the super reach γ deviation when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. When the variable display is executed in the pattern, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the ratio of the cut-in effect being executed in the pattern CI-3 is the highest, and the pachinko game When the set value set in the machine 1 is 4, the cut-in effect is the pattern CI-3.
The rate of execution is set low. Therefore, the higher the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more frequently the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, and the variable display result is out of order. Since the player can be expected to be set, the game interest can be improved.

In the feature unit 208SG of the embodiment, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ out of line. Illustrates a mode in which the higher the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the higher the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3. It is not limited, and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ out of line, the pachinko game Regardless of the set value set in the machine 1, the ratio at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 may be the same ratio. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 in the variable display of the deviation of the super reach γ, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. It can be difficult to identify the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6, which reach effect is to be executed and whether to execute the resurrection effect is determined in advance in association with each variation pattern, and is also determined in FIG. 8-13.
As shown in (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table of 1 regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, when the variable display result is a big hit, the ratio of executing the revival effect during the variable display is the same regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For this reason, the execution rate of the resurrection effect during the variable display follows the set value that determines the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit, so the player should pay attention to whether or not the resurrection effect is executed during the variable display. Can be done, and the game entertainment can be improved.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the reach effect and whether or not to execute the revival effect is illustrated by exemplifying a form in which a predetermined form is determined in association with each variation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute the reach effect and whether or not to execute the revival effect is changed by the effect control CPU 120 after the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern. It may be appropriately determined from the display result and the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-6 and 8-22, as the variation pattern in the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment, the variation pattern (PA) for executing the reach effect of the super reach δ.
2-5 and PB1-6) are provided, and when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach δ, the variable display result is always a big hit.
As the variation of the super reach effect increases, the player can pay attention to whether or not the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach δ and the variable display result becomes a big hit. , You can improve the game entertainment.

In addition, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the embodiment in which the variation pattern (PA2-5 and PB1-6) for executing the reach effect of the super reach δ is provided has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Therefore, it is possible not to provide a variation pattern for executing the reach effect of the super reach δ.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as the effects that can be executed during the variable display, a notice effect that can be executed during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach (or until the end timing of the variable display) and the reach. There is a cut-in effect that can be executed during the effect. Further, the advance notice effect can be executed by any of a plurality of effect patterns (patterns YE-1 to pattern YE-4) having different jackpot expectations. Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-26, when the variable display result is a big hit and the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-4, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit. Determines the effect pattern from the effect patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4, which are highly expected to hit the jackpot, when the advance notice effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be a big hit by being executed by YE-3 or YE-4. Therefore, if it is decided to execute the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-4, whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit by executing the advance notice effect in the pattern YE-1 or the pattern YE-2. It is possible to pay attention until the variable display of the crab is completed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 and 8-28,
In the variable display of 1, the notice effect can be executed at the timing before the cut-in effect (during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach), so that the cut-in is performed when the variable display result becomes a big hit. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the variable display result becomes a big hit from the timing before the production is executed, and to prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

In addition, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the embodiment in which the advance notice effect can be executed at the timing prior to the cut-in effect during the variable display of 1 is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the advance notice effect may be executed as a look-ahead effect during the variable display that is executed before the variable display that executes the cut-in effect. Further, the advance notice effect is executed during the period from the start of the cut-in effect to the end of the reach effect, so that the variable display result is obtained in the period from the start of the cut-in effect to the end of the reach effect. It may be possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the game is a big hit and to prevent the game from being enjoyed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-21 and 8-22, when the variable display result is a big hit, the big hit type is always big hit C when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-4. On the other hand, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the jackpot type can be any of the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, so the cut-in effect is changed to the pattern CI-4 during the variable display. It is possible to draw attention to the player whether or not it is executed. In addition
When the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, there is a possibility that the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B. Therefore, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is off. In the case of, it is possible to make the player think that even if it is a big hit, it may have been a big hit A or a big hit B, so that the game interest is lowered because the variable display result is out of order. Can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-26, any of 4 to 6 is set as a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (that is, the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is obtained. When the cut-in effect is decided to be executed in the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, when the advance notice effect is executed, the expectation of a big hit is high. Production pattern (Pattern Y) excluding pattern YE-3 and pattern YE-4
Since the production pattern is determined from E-1 and pattern YE-2), the advance notice production is pattern YE.
It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be a big hit by executing with -3 or YE-4. Therefore, even though the variable display result does not become a big hit, the player against the fact that the variable display result becomes a big hit when the pattern CI-3 and the patterns YE-3 and YE-4 are executed during the same variable display. It is possible to prevent the expectation of the above from being excessively raised.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, any of 4 to 6 is set as a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the cut-in effect is the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit. Pattern YE-3 and pattern Y of the notice production when the execution of
As a form for restricting execution in E-4, the execution rate of pattern YE-3 or pattern YE-4 is set to 0% (notice effect is disabled in pattern YE-3 or pattern YE-4). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any of 4 to 6 is set as a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the cut-in effect is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit. When the execution in pattern CI-3 is decided, the advance notice effect is given in pattern YE-.
It may be possible to execute the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4 at a rate lower than that of the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-2. That is, in the present claim, "when the advantageous setting value is set and it is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the suggestion effect is performed in an embodiment including the specific effect. When it is executed, the execution of the second predetermined effect is restricted. ”In order to prevent the advance notice effect from being executed by the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4, the advance notice effect is performed by the pattern YE-1 or the pattern. A form in which the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4 is executed at a lower rate than the case where the YE-2 is executed is also included.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-21, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern (PA2-) that is out of the super reach γ.
In the case of 4), if the set values are the same, the ratio of the cut-in effect being executed in the pattern CI-3 in the high accuracy high base state is in the low accuracy low base state and the low accuracy high base state. The cut-in effect is set higher than the ratio executed in the pattern CI-3. Therefore, when the gaming state is the high-accuracy high-base state, the cut-in effect is produced in the variable display of the super reach γ out of line compared to the case where the gaming state is the low-accuracy low-base state or the low-accuracy high-base state. Since the ratio of execution in the pattern CI-3 is high, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6 in the high accuracy and high base state. After the player recognizes that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6 by executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 in the high accuracy and high base state. Is able to improve the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 because it is easy for the player to continue the game even after the gaming state shifts to the low probability low base state.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ out of line (PA2-4).
When the variable display is executed in, when the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state, if the set values are the same, the gaming state is higher than the low accuracy low base state or the low accuracy high base state. Although the embodiment in which the cut-in effect can be performed by the pattern CI-3 is illustrated by the ratio, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are 4 to 6. When the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) of either of them and the super reach γ is out of alignment, if the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state, the cut-in effect is set to the pattern CI-3.
On the other hand, when the gaming state is a low-accuracy low-base state or a low-accuracy high-base state, the cut-in effect may be disabled by the pattern CI-3.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and the present invention includes any changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention. ..

For example, in the feature unit 208SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-21, when the variable display is executed by the variation pattern (PB1-5) that executes the resurrection effect, the variation pattern that does not execute the resurrection effect is not executed. Although the embodiment in which the cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3 at a lower rate than the case where the variable display is executed by (PA2-4 or PB1-4) is illustrated, the present invention is limited to this. Not a thing, but as a modification 208SG-1, FIGS. 8-33 (A) to 8-.
As shown in 33 (E), when the variable display is executed in the variable pattern (PB1-5) in which the revival effect is executed, the cut-in effect may not be executed in the pattern CI-3. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, any of 4 to 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Even though the player recognizes that it is set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the game interest due to the fact that the revival effect is executed and the variable display result is notified that the jackpot is a big hit.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the above-described embodiment, the super reach γ that executes the revival effect
When the variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot, the ratio of executing the cut-in effect with the pattern CI-3 is lower than when the variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot without executing the revival effect. Although the set modes have been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and FIGS. 8-34 (A) to 8-34 (D) are shown as modified examples 208SG-2.
As shown in, when the variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the resurrection effect, it is cut more than when the variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection effect. The ratio of executing the in-effect in the pattern CI-3 may be set high. By doing so, for example, the player places more importance on whether or not the variable display result is a big hit than whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. In the case of, after the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, the revival effect is further executed and the variable display result is a big hit. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is notified,
You can improve your game entertainment.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the above-described embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (PB1-5) of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect is executed regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to any of 1 to 6. ) When executing variable display, the cut-in effect is pattern CI
Although the feasible embodiment is illustrated in -3, the present invention is not limited to this, as shown in FIGS. 8-35 (A) to 8-35 (C) as a modified example 208SG-3. , When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, it is cut when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PB1-5) of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect. While the in-effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the super reach γ that executes the revival effect is executed.
When the variable display is executed in the jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-5), the cut-in effect may be disabled in the pattern CI-3. By doing so, when executing the variable display with the fluctuation pattern (PB1-5) of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect,
The variable display result is a big hit, and the set values set for the pachinko game machine 1 are 4 to 6.
After it is confirmed that one of the above is confirmed and the variable display result is out of order during the reach effect of Super Reach γ during the variable display, the revival effect is executed and the variable display result becomes a big hit. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the game is notified, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

That is, in the feature unit 208SG, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ, the setting is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 even if the variable display result is out of order. By determining that the value is any of 4 to 6, it is possible to promote the continuation of the game to the player, but in this feature unit 208SG-3, the reach of the super reach γ is being produced. When the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the variable display result becomes a big hit, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4 to
By confirming that it is one of 6, it is possible to promote the continuation of the game to the player.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-26, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ deviation. When the variable display is executed in (PA2-4), if the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in the pattern CI-1 or the pattern CI-2, which is an effect pattern with a low expectation of a big hit, the cut-in effect is executed. Is a production pattern with high expectations for big hits, pattern CI
Although the embodiment in which the advance notice effect can be executed by the pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than the case where the execution by -3 is determined is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the modification 208SG
As shown in FIGS. 8-36 (A) to 8-36 (C) as -4, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the super reach γ is out of alignment. When the variable display is executed in the variable pattern (PA2-4), if the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, the cut-in effect is expected to be a big hit. The advance notice effect may be executed in the pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than in the case where the execution in the pattern CI-1 or the pattern CI-2, which is a low-degree effect pattern, is decided. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ, the cut-in effect is the pattern CI-1 or the pattern CI-2.
By executing the advance notice effect in the pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than when it is executed in, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be out of alignment. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the variable display result is a big hit, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the feature portion 208SG of the above-described embodiment, FIGS. 8-21 (C) to 8-21 (E)
As shown in, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) of the super reach γ outlier.
When the game state is the high accuracy high base state, if the set values are the same, the cut-in effect is pattern CI at a higher rate than when the game state is the low accuracy low base state or the low accuracy high base state.
Although the feasible form is illustrated in -3, the present invention is not limited to this, and the modification 2
As shown in FIG. 8-37 as 08SG-5, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ out of line (PA2-4).
When the variable display is executed in, when the gaming state is the low accuracy low base state or the low accuracy high base state, if the set values are the same, the gaming state is higher than the high accuracy high base state. The cut-in effect may be executed by the pattern CI-3 at a rate.

By doing so, when the gaming state is the low-accuracy low-base state or the low-accuracy high-base state, the rate during the reach production of the super reach γ is higher than that when the gaming state is the high-accuracy high-base state. Since the cut-in effect is easily executed by the pattern CI-3, for example, the variable display result does not become a big hit over a long period of time (for example, 1000 variable displays) in the low accuracy low base state, so that the player When the motivation to continue the game is reduced, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, that is, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. Is notified to the player, so that the player's willingness to continue playing the game can be improved, so that the game interest in the low-accuracy low-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state can be improved.

In the modified example 208SG-5, the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are 4 to 6.
When the variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) of the super reach γ out of line, and the gaming state is the low probability low base state or the low probability high base state, the set value is Although the embodiment in which the cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3 at a higher rate than the case where the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state if the values are the same, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIG. 8-38 as a modified example 208SG-6, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the fluctuation pattern (PA2-) out of the super reach γ. When the variable display is executed in 4), if the gaming state is the low accuracy low base state or the low accuracy high base state, the cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3, while the gaming state is highly accurate. In the high base state, the cut-in effect may be disabled by the pattern CI-3. By doing so, the cut-in effect is pattern CI-during the reach effect of the super reach γ only when the game state is the low accuracy low base state or the low accuracy high base state.
Since it can be executed in 3, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the low-determined base state and the low-accuracy high-base state in which the variable display result is less likely to be a big hit than the high-accuracy high-base state. It is possible to improve the game entertainment in a low accuracy and high base state.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the above-described embodiment, super reach γ and super reach δ
Although the embodiment in which the cut-in effect can be executed during the reach effect of the above is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, as a modified example 208SG-7, FIGS. 8-40 (A) and 8
As shown in -40 (B), during the reach production of super reach γ and super reach δ, instead of the cut-in production, a setting value suggestion effect suggesting the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed. It may be possible. In this way, when the set value suggestion effect can be executed during the reach effect of the super reach γ or the super reach δ, the period before the executable period (during the reach effect) of the set value suggestion effect (for example). , The period from the start of the variable display to the reach), the above-mentioned advance notice effect may be executed, and the execution rate of the set value suggestion effect may be different depending on the effect pattern of the advance notice effect.

Specifically, when the advance notice effect is executed in pattern YE-3 or pattern YE-4,
It suffices that the set value suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than when the notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-1 or the pattern YE-2. By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to which effect pattern the advance notice effect is executed in, and when the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4, Since the player can pay attention to whether or not the set value suggestion effect is executed during the reach effect, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the set value suggestion effect.

(Explanation of feature section 027SH)
Next, a game machine related to the feature unit 027SH will be described. The gaming machine according to the feature unit 027SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game. In this embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game will be described as an example.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH includes a game control means and an effect executing means. The game control means is realized by, for example, the CPU 103 of the main board 11. The effect execution means is realized by, for example, the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12. The effect execution means is various effects (for example, various notice effects, item image effects, etc., which will be described later).
Is feasible.

FIG. 9-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH of the present embodiment. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH is provided with a movable body 027SH 32, which is an accessory, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-1. The movable body 027SH32 is
According to the control of the effect control board 12, as shown in FIGS. 9-6 (E) to 9-6 (G), the first
It operates between a state (initial state) and a second state (tilted state). For example, movable body 02
The 7SH32 operates in the order of the first state → the second state → the first state, or the first state → the second state → the first state.
State → 2nd state → 1st state and operation, 1st state → state between 1st state and 2nd state (
It may operate in the order of (temporarily stopped) → second state → first state, or in the order of first state → state between the first state and the second state (temporarily stopped) → first state. It should be noted that the other configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH in the gaming board 2 are the same as the configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature portion 208SG shown in FIG. 8-1. Is omitted.

FIG. 9-2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the hit probability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH. Specifically, FIG. 9-2 (A) shows the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value (set values "1" to "6") when the gaming state is in the low probability state. FIG. 9-2 (B) shows the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value (set values “1” to “6”) when the gaming state is in the highly accurate state. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH is classified according to the gaming state (
Different from low probability state or high probability state), different set value (different from set value "1" to "6")
In addition, multiple types of display result judgment tables for special figures corresponding to each (Fig. 9-2 (A) for each).
Twelve types of special figure display result judgment tables, to which the big hit judgment value and the small hit judgment value are assigned so as to have the big hit probability and the small hit probability as shown in (B), are stored, for example. In the winning random number value determination process, the CPU 103 uses one of the above-mentioned special figure display result determination tables for the special figure display result determination table to make a big hit.
It suffices to determine whether it will be a small hit or (it will be a miss).

FIG. 9-2 (C) shows the types of jackpots. FIG. 9-2 (D) shows the distribution of jackpots for the first special symbol. FIG. 9-2 (E) shows the distribution of jackpots for the second special symbol. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH has a special symbol (No.
Multiple types of jackpot type judgment tables corresponding to each of 1 special symbol or 2 special symbol (each is sorted as shown in FIGS. 9-2 (D) (E)). To the first
A judgment value corresponding to one big hit, a judgment value corresponding to the second big hit, and a judgment value corresponding to the third big hit are assigned (two types of big hit type judgment tables), for example, C.
The PU 103 uses one of the above-mentioned plurality of types of jackpot type determination tables when it is determined that a jackpot will be achieved based on the special figure display result determination table in the winning random number value determination process. Then, the type of big hit (big hit type) may be determined.

FIG. 9-3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH. FIG. 9-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the types of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times). Fluctuation pattern # 10 is a non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern # 11 is a non-reach out-of-reach (for shortening) fluctuation pattern. Fluctuation pattern # 12 is a fluctuation pattern that is out of normal reach. Fluctuation pattern # 13 is from normal reach to super reach A
It is a fluctuation pattern that develops into and eventually becomes out of order. Fluctuation pattern # 14 is a fluctuation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach B and finally becomes out of order. Fluctuation pattern # 15 is a fluctuation pattern of small hits. Fluctuation pattern # 16 is a fluctuation pattern of a normal reach jackpot. Fluctuation pattern # 17 is a fluctuation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach A and finally becomes a big hit. Fluctuation pattern # 18 is a fluctuation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach B and finally becomes a big hit.

FIG. 9-3 (B) is an example of the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern. Expectation of big hit (reliability)
Is Super Reach B> Super Reach A> Normal Reach. The jackpot expectation of a certain effect a is, for example, (probability that effect a is executed when it becomes a big hit) × (probability that it becomes a big hit) / {(probability that effect a is executed when it becomes a big hit) × ( Calculated by (probability of becoming a big hit) + (probability that production a is executed when a big hit does not occur) x (probability of not becoming a big hit)} (when the expected degree of big hit becomes "1", it is always "big hit" Become).

For example, the reliability of Super Reach A is (0.3 × 1/320) / when the set value is 1.
{(0.3 × 1/320) + (0.009 × 319/320)} = about 9.5%. The reliability of Super Reach A is (0.3 × 1/295) / {(0) when the set value is 6.
.. 3 × 1/295) + (0.009 × 294/295)} = about 10.2%.

Further, the reliability of Super Reach B is (0.6 × 1/320) / {when the set value is 1.
(0.6 × 1/320) + (0.001 × 319/320)} = about 65.3%. Further, the reliability of Super Reach B is (0.6 × 1/295) / {(0) when the set value is 6.
.. 6 × 1/295) + (0.001 × 294/295)} = about 67.1%.

According to the example of FIG. 9-3 (B), the fluctuation pattern # 11 is not determined during the low base, but for example, the fluctuation pattern # 11 is determined even during the low base according to the number of reserved memories. It may be. Further, according to the example of FIG. 9-3 (B), the fluctuation pattern # 10 is not determined during the high base, but the fluctuation pattern # 10 is determined even during the high base according to, for example, the number of reserved memories. It may be.

FIG. 9-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the advance notice effect. 9-5 and 9-6 are production examples of the respective notice effects. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH can execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects as shown in FIG. 9-4. In this embodiment, each of the plurality of types of advance notice effects can be specified by the advance notice effect patterns.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" shown in FIG. 9-4 is a cut-in notice effect (display of a weak cut-in image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH is
As a notice effect (cut-in notice effect / display of a weak cut-in image) of the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1", for example, a weak cut-in image 027SHY as shown in FIG. 9-5 (A).
Display KE-JCI.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" shown in FIG. 9-4 is a cut-in notice effect (display of a strong cut-in image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH is
As a notice effect (cut-in notice effect / display of a strong cut-in image) of the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2", for example, a strong cut-in image 027SHY as shown in FIG. 9-5 (B).
Display KE-KCI.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-B" shown in FIG. 9-4 is a group notice effect (display of a group image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH has a notice production pattern “Y”.
As the advance notice effect (group notice effect) of "EP-B", for example, a group image 027SHYKE-GN as shown in FIG. 9-5 (C) is displayed.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" shown in FIG. 9-4 is a button notice effect (display of button image → press → weak cut-in image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH is shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) and 9-6 (B), for example, as a notice effect (button notice effect / display of a weak cut-in image) of the notice effect pattern “YEP-C1”. Like, button image 0
27SHYKE-BU, weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI is displayed. In addition, it should be noted
The weak cut-in image displayed in the button notice effect may be different from the weak cut-in image displayed in the cut-in notice effect.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-C2" shown in FIG. 9-4 is a button notice effect (display of button image → press → strong cut-in image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH is shown in FIGS. 9-6 (C) and 9-6 (D), for example, as a notice effect (button notice effect / display of a strong cut-in image) of the notice effect pattern “YEP-C2”. Like, button image 0
27SHYKE-BU, strong cut-in image 027SHYKE-KCI is displayed. In addition, it should be noted
The strong cut-in image displayed in the button notice effect may be different from the strong cut-in image displayed in the cut-in notice effect.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-D" shown in FIG. 9-4 is a character advance notice effect (operation of the character). The pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH has a notice production pattern “Y”.
As the advance notice effect (movement of the accessory) of "EP-D", for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-6 (E) (F) (G), the movable body 027SH32 is operated.

FIG. 9-7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of the advance notice effect and the like. FIG. 9-7 (A) is an example of a determination ratio of whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect (display of a weak cut-in image or display of a strong cut-in image). According to the example shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), when the super reach is out of order (when either the fluctuation pattern # 13 or # 14 is achieved), the execution is 40.
It is determined at a rate of%, and if it becomes a super reach jackpot (when it becomes either fluctuation pattern # 17 or # 18), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 50%. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH executes a cut-in notice effect execution presence / absence determination table for super reach loss, which allocates 40% of the total as a judgment value corresponding to execution existence, and 50% of the total. The cut-in notice effect execution presence / absence determination table for the super reach jackpot, which is assigned as the judgment value corresponding to Yes, is stored. For example, the effect control CPU 120 is for super reach loss when the super reach is lost. Use the cut-in notice effect execution presence / absence determination table to determine whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect, and if it becomes a super reach jackpot, use the cut-in notice effect execution presence / absence determination table for the super reach jackpot. You may decide whether or not to execute the effect. The same applies to the determination of whether or not to execute other notice effects (group notice effect, button notice effect, character advance notice effect). If the super reach does not occur (if any of the fluctuation patterns # 10, # 11, # 12, # 15, and # 16), the presence or absence of execution is determined at a rate of 0% (determine not to execute). ).

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH decides to execute the cut-in notice effect, the notice effect patterns (“YEP-A1”, “YEP-A” related to the cut-in notice effect).
2 ”) is decided. FIG. 9-7 (B) shows a notice effect pattern (“YEP-A1”, “YEP-A2”) of the cut-in notice effect when it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect.
This is an example of the determination ratio of. According to the example shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), when the super reach is lost, the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 80%, and the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" is 20. Determined at a rate of%. In the case of a super reach jackpot, the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 20%, and the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" is determined at a rate of 80%. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH allocates 80% of the whole as a determination value corresponding to the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" and 20% of the whole corresponds to the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2". The cut-in notice effect pattern determination table for the super reach loss assigned as the judgment value, 20% of the whole is assigned as the judgment value corresponding to the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1", and 80% of the whole is the notice effect pattern " The cut-in notice effect pattern determination table for the super reach jackpot assigned as the determination value corresponding to "YEP-A2" is stored. For example, the effect control CPU 120 super reach when the super reach is lost. Use the cut-in notice effect pattern determination table for out-of-order to determine the advance notice effect pattern for the cut-in advance notice effect, and if it becomes a super reach jackpot, cut in using the cut-in advance notice effect pattern determination table for the super reach jackpot. The notice production pattern of the notice effect may be determined. The same applies to the determination of the advance notice effect pattern of other advance notice effects (button advance notice effects).

FIG. 9-7 (C) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the group notice effect (display of the group image).
According to the example shown in FIG. 9-7 (C), if the super reach is out of order, the execution rate is 20%.
In the case of a super reach jackpot, the rate of execution is determined at a rate of 50%. In addition, there is one type of notice production pattern related to the group notice production (notice production pattern "YEP-B").
) Therefore, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH decides to execute the group notice effect, the notice effect pattern "YEP-B" is used as the notice effect pattern related to the group notice effect.
To decide. If it does not reach super reach, it will be decided at a rate of 0%.
Decide not to do it).

FIG. 9-7 (D) shows the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the button notice effect (display of button image → press → display of weak cut-in image, or display of button image → press → display of strong cut-in image). This is an example. According to the example shown in FIG. 9-7 (D), when the super reach is out of order, the execution rate is determined at a rate of 10%, and when the super reach jackpot is achieved, the execution rate is determined at a rate of 50%. To do. If it does not reach super reach, it is decided that there is execution at a rate of 0% (it is decided not to execute).

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH decides to execute the button notice effect, it determines the notice effect pattern (“YEP-C1”, “YEP-C2”) related to the button notice effect. FIG. 9-7 (E) is an example of the determination ratio of the advance notice effect patterns (“YEP-C1” and “YEP-C2”) related to the button advance notice effect when it is decided to execute the button advance notice effect. According to the example shown in FIG. 9-7 (E), when the super reach is out of order,
The notice production pattern "YEP-C1" is determined at a rate of 90%, and the notice production pattern "YEP"
-C2 "is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, in the case of a super reach jackpot, the notice production pattern "YEP-C1" is determined at a rate of 10%, and the notice production pattern "YEP-C" is determined.
2 ”is determined at a rate of 90%.

FIG. 9-7 (F) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the bonus notice effect (movement of the bonus).
According to the example shown in FIG. 9-7 (F), when the super reach is out of order, the execution rate is determined at a rate of 5%, and when the super reach jackpot is achieved, the execution rate is determined at a rate of 75%. To do.
In addition, there is one type of notice effect pattern related to the character advance notice effect (notice effect pattern "YEP-D").
) Therefore, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH decides to execute the character advance notice effect, the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-" is used as the advance notice effect pattern related to the character advance notice effect.
Determine "D". If it does not reach super reach, it is decided that there is execution at a rate of 0% (it is decided not to execute).

According to FIG. 9-7, in the case of super reach, a maximum of four types of advance notice effects are executed.

In addition, the probability that the cut-in notice effect (display of weak cut-in image or display of strong cut-in image) will be executed at the time of super reach is {(probability of loss × super reach at the time of loss). Probability of becoming x Probability of performing a cut-in notice effect when the super reach is off) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming a super reach when a big hit x Super reach The cut-in notice effect is executed when a big hit Probability)} / {(Probability of losing x Probability of becoming super reach when losing) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming super reach when hitting a big hit)} If the set value is 1, { (319/32
0 x 1% x 40%) + (1/320 x 90% x 50%)} / {(319/320 x 1%)
+ (1/320 x 90%)} = about 42%.

In addition, the probability that the group notice effect (display of the group image) will be executed when it becomes super reach is
{(Probability of losing x Probability of becoming super reach when out of reach x Probability of executing group notice effect when out of super reach) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming super reach when hitting a big hit x Super Probability that group notice production will be executed at the time of reach jackpot)} /
Calculated from {(probability of losing x probability of becoming super reach when losing) + (probability of becoming a big hit x probability of becoming super reach when hitting a big hit)}, if the set value is 1, {
(319/320 x 1% x 20%) + (1/320 x 90% x 50%)} / {(319 /
320 × 1%) + (1/320 × 90%)} = about 26%.

In addition, the probability that the button notice effect (display of button image->press-> display of weak cut-in image or display of button image->press-> display of strong cut-in image) will be executed at the time of super reach is { (Probability of losing x Probability of becoming super reach when missing x Probability of executing button notice effect when super reach is out) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming super reach when hitting a big hit x Super reach Probability that the button notice effect will be executed at the time of a big hit)} / {(Probability of becoming a miss x Probability of becoming a super reach at the time of losing) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming a super reach at the time of a big hit)} Calculated from, in the case of the set value 1, {(319/320 x 1% x 10%) + (1/320 x 90% x 5)
0%)} / {(319/320 × 1%) + (1/320 × 90%)} = about 19%.

In addition, the probability that the character advance notice effect (action of the character) will be executed when it becomes super reach is
{(Probability of losing x Probability of becoming super reach when losing x Probability of executing the character advance notice effect when losing super reach) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming super reach when hitting a big hit x Probability that the character notice production will be executed at the time of super reach jackpot)
} / {(Probability of losing x Probability of becoming super reach at the time of losing) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming super reach at the time of a big hit)} When the set value is 1, {(319) / 320 x 1% x 5%) + (1/320 x 90% x 75%)} / {(319)
/ 320 × 1%) + (1/320 × 90%)} = about 20%.

FIG. 9-8 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the item image effect. FIG. 9-9 is a display example of each item image. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH is shown in FIG. 9-8 (A).
), It is possible to execute multiple types of item image effects.

The item image advance notice effect of the item image effect pattern "IGEP-A" shown in FIG. 9-8 (A) is an item image suggesting that the cut-in advance notice effect (YEP-A1 or YEP-A2) is executed. It is an item image effect A that displays A. In other words, the item image A displayed in the item image effect A can specify the type of advance notice effect to be executed (specifically, the cut-in advance notice effect).

In the item image effect A, depending on the display mode of the item image A (first to third display modes),
The strength (high or low reliability) of the suggestion that the cut-in notice effect will be executed is different.

Specifically, the item image A of the first display mode (level 1) is a weak suggestion that weakly suggests that the cut-in notice effect is executed. That is, the item image A in the first display mode is
It suggests with low reliability whether the cut-in notice effect will be executed. The item image 027SHIGALV1 shown in FIG. 9-9 (A) is an example of the first display mode (level 1) of the item image A. In this embodiment, the first display mode (level 1) of the item image A (the same applies to the item image B to the item image D) is blue.

The item image A of the second display mode (level 2) is a medium suggestion that moderately suggests that the cut-in notice effect is executed. That is, the item image A in the second display mode suggests whether the cut-in notice effect is executed with a moderate degree of reliability. The item image 027SHIGALV2 shown in FIG. 9-9 (B) is an example of the second display mode (level 2) of the item image A. In this embodiment, the second display mode (level 2) of the item image A (the same applies to the item image B to the item image D) is green.

The item image A of the third display mode (level 3) is a strong suggestion that strongly suggests that the cut-in notice effect is executed. That is, the item image A in the third display mode suggests with high reliability whether the cut-in notice effect is executed. Item image 0 shown in FIG. 9-9 (C)
27SHIGALV3 is an example of the third display mode (level 3) of the item image A. In this embodiment, the third display mode (level 3) of the item image A (the same applies to the item image B to the item image D) is red.

The item image advance notice effect of the item image effect pattern "IGEP-B" shown in FIG. 9-8 (A) is an item that displays an item image B suggesting that the group advance notice effect (YEP-B) is executed. Image production B. In other words, the item image B displayed in the item image effect B can specify the type of advance notice effect to be executed (specifically, the group advance notice effect).

In the item image effect B, depending on the display mode of the item image B (first to third display modes),
The strength (high or low reliability) of the suggestion that the group notice production will be executed is different.

Specifically, the item image B of the first display mode (level 1) is a weak suggestion that weakly suggests that the group notice effect is executed. That is, the item image B of the first display mode suggests whether the group notice effect is executed with low reliability. Item image 027 shown in FIG. 9-9 (D)
SHIGBLV1 is an example of the first display mode (level 1) of the item image B.

The item image B of the second display mode (level 2) is a medium suggestion that moderately suggests that the group notice effect is executed. That is, the item image B of the second display mode suggests whether the group notice effect is executed with a moderate degree of reliability. Item image 027SH shown in FIG. 9-9 (E)
IGBLV2 is an example of the second display mode (level 2) of the item image B.

The item image B of the third display mode (level 3) is a strong suggestion that strongly suggests that the group notice effect is executed. That is, the item image B in the third display mode suggests with high reliability whether the group notice effect is executed. Item image 027SHIGBL shown in FIG. 9-9 (F)
V3 is an example of the third display mode (level 3) of the item image B.

The item image advance notice effect of the item image effect pattern "IGEP-C" shown in FIG. 9-8 (A) suggests that the button advance notice effect (YEP-C1 or YEP-C2) is executed. Is an item image effect C for displaying. In other words, the item image C displayed in the item image effect C can specify the type of the advance notice effect to be executed (specifically, the button advance notice effect).

In the item image effect C, depending on the display mode (first to third display modes) of the item image C,
The strength of the suggestion (high or low reliability) of whether the button notice effect is executed is different.

Specifically, the item image C of the first display mode (level 1) is a weak suggestion that weakly suggests that the button notice effect is executed. That is, the item image C of the first display mode suggests whether or not the button notice effect is executed with low reliability. The item image 027SHIGCLV1 shown in FIG. 9-9 (G) is an example of the first display mode (level 1) of the item image C.

The item image C of the second display mode (level 2) is a medium suggestion that moderately suggests that the button notice effect is executed. That is, the item image C in the second display mode suggests whether the button notice effect is executed with a moderate degree of reliability. Item image 0 shown in FIG. 9-9 (H)
27SHIGCLV2 is an example of the second display mode (level 2) of the item image C.

The item image C of the third display mode (level 3) is a strong suggestion that strongly suggests that the button notice effect is executed. That is, the item image C in the third display mode suggests with high reliability whether the button notice effect is executed. Item image 027SH shown in FIG. 9-9 (I)
IGCLV3 is an example of the third display mode (level 3) of the item image C.

The item image advance notice effect of the item image effect pattern "IGEP-D" shown in FIG. 9-8 (A) displays the item image D suggesting that the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed. Item image production D. In other words, the item image D displayed in the item image effect D can specify the type of the advance notice effect to be executed (specifically, the character advance notice effect).

In the item image effect D, depending on the display mode (first to third display modes) of the item image D,
The strength (high or low reliability) of the suggestion that the character advance notice production will be executed is different.

Specifically, the item image D of the first display mode (level 1) is a weak suggestion that weakly suggests that the character advance notice effect is executed. That is, the item image D in the first display mode suggests with low reliability whether or not the character advance notice effect is executed. Item image 0 shown in FIG. 9-9 (J)
27SHIGDLV1 is an example of the first display mode (level 1) of the item image D.

The item image D of the second display mode (level 2) is a medium suggestion that moderately suggests that the character advance notice effect is executed. That is, the item image D in the second display mode suggests with a moderate degree of reliability whether or not the character advance notice effect is executed. Item image 027 shown in FIG. 9-9 (K)
SHIGDLV2 is an example of the second display mode (level 2) of the item image D.

The item image D of the third display mode (level 3) is a strong suggestion that strongly suggests that the character advance notice effect is executed. That is, the item image D in the third display mode suggests with a high degree of reliability whether or not the character advance notice effect is executed. Item image 027SHIG shown in FIG. 9-9 (L)
DLV3 is an example of the third display mode (level 3) of the item image D.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH has an item image effect A (IGEP-A), an item image effect B (IGEP-B), and an item image effect C (I) shown in FIG. 9-8 (A).
Regarding the four types of item image effects of GEP-C) and item image effect D (IGEP-D), one of the four types may not be executed, or only one of the four types may be executed. There are cases where two of the four types are executed, there are cases where three of the four types are executed, and there are cases where all four types are executed.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH can change the display mode of the item image to be displayed in the item image production. In other words, feature unit 027S
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to H can execute an item image effect that changes the display mode of the item image. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH may change the display mode of the item image A from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2) during the execution of the item image effect A. It is possible. In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH can execute the item image effect A that changes the display mode of the item image A from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2). is there. Item image production B
The same applies to item image effect C and item image effect D.

FIG. 9-8 (B) shows the contents of the item image effect execution mode pattern. The item image production execution mode pattern is common to each item image production (item image production A, item image production B, item image production C, item image production D), and is any one for each item image production. Item image effect execution mode pattern is determined (details will be described later).

The item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1” shown in FIG. 9-8 (B) is an item image effect execution mode pattern that does not execute the item image effect. Since the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" does not execute the item image effect, the item image is not displayed.

The item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2” shown in FIG. 9-8 (B) is an item image effect execution mode pattern for executing the item image effect, and the display mode of the item image is set to the first display mode (level). This is an item image effect execution mode pattern that does not change as it is in 1).

The item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP3” shown in FIG. 9-8 (B) is an item image effect execution mode pattern for executing the item image effect, and the item image display mode is the first display mode (level). This is an item image effect execution mode pattern for changing from 1) to the second display mode (level 2).

The item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP4” shown in FIG. 9-8 (B) is an item image effect execution mode pattern for executing the item image effect, and the display mode of the item image is set to the first display mode (level). Change from 1) to the second display mode (level 2), and further
This is an item image effect execution mode pattern for changing from the second display mode (level 2) to the third display mode (level 3).

The item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP5” shown in FIG. 9-8 (B) is an item image effect execution mode pattern for executing the item image effect, and the display mode of the item image is set to the first display mode (level). This is an item image effect execution mode pattern for changing from 1) to the third display mode (level 3).

Therefore, although details will be described later, for example, the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP3” is determined for the item image effect A (IGEP-A), and the item image effect B (I
For GEP-B), the item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" was determined.
About item image production C (IGEP-C) Item image production execution mode pattern "IG
When "EGP2" is determined and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" is determined for the item image effect D (IGEP-D), the display mode of the item image A is changed from the first display mode (level 1) to the first. 2 Item image effect A (IGEP-A) that changes the display mode (level 2), and item image effect C (IGEP-C) that does not change the display mode of the item image C as the first display mode (level 1). , Item image effect D (I) that changes the display mode of the item image D from the first display mode (level 1) to the third display mode (level 3).
GEP-D) and will be executed (item image effect B will not be executed).

FIG. 9-10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of the item image effect and the like. Figure 9-
10 (A) and 9-10 (B) are examples of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A (IGEP-A). Specifically, FIG. 9-10 (A) shows the item image effect execution of the item image effect A (IGEP-A) when the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2) is executed in the super reach. This is an example of the determination ratio of the aspect pattern. FIG. 9-10 (B) shows the item image effect A (YEP-A1, YEP-A2) when the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2) is not executed in the super reach.
This is an example of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of IGEP-A).

9-10 (C) and 9-10 (D) are examples of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B (IGEP-B). Specifically, FIG. 9-10 (C)
) Is an example of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) when the group notice effect (YEP-B) is executed in the super reach. FIG. 9-10 (D) is an example of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) when the group notice effect (YEP-B) is not executed in the super reach.

9-10 (E) and 9-10 (F) are examples of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C (IGEP-C). Specifically, FIG. 9-10 (E)
) Is an example of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) when the button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2) is executed in the super reach. FIG. 9-10 (F) shows the item image effect C (YEP-C1 and YEP-C2) when the button notice effect (YEP-C1 and YEP-C2) is not executed in the super reach.
This is an example of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of IGEP-C).

9-10 (G) and 9-10 (H) are examples of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D (IGEP-D). Specifically, FIG. 9-10 (G)
) Is an example of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) when the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed in the super reach. FIG. 9-10 (H) shows the character advance notice production (YEP-D) in the super reach.
This is an example of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) when is not executed.

According to FIG. 9-10, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A that displays the item image A and suggests the execution of the cut-in notice effect (that is, the item image effect A).
(Display mode of the item image A when the item image effect A is executed)
Is determined by whether or not the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2) is executed. In addition, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B that displays the item image B and suggests the execution of the group notice effect (that is, whether the item image effect B is executed or the item image effect B is executed) is executed. The display mode of the item image B in the case) is a group notice effect (YEP).
-B) is determined by whether or not it is executed. Further, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C that displays the item image C and suggests the execution of the button notice effect (that is, whether the item image effect C is executed or the item image effect C is executed) is executed. The display mode of the item image C in the case) is determined by whether or not the button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2) is executed. Further, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D that displays the item image D and suggests the execution of the character advance notice effect (that is, whether the item image effect D is executed or the item image effect D is executed). The display mode of the item image D in this case) is determined by whether or not the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed.

As specific examples, the reliability of the suggestion of the cut-in notice effect for each display mode of the item image A displayed in the item image effect A, and the button notice effect for each display mode of the item image C displayed in the item image effect C. The reliability of the suggestion will be explained.

(Reliability of suggestion of cut-in notice effect for each display mode of item image A)
According to FIGS. 9-10 (A) and 9-10 (B), the final display mode of the item image A is the third display mode (level 3), which is the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4".
"Is determined. When the cut-in notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a rate of 50% (Fig. 9-10 (A)), and when the cut-in notice effect is not executed, 10%. The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined by the ratio (FIG. 9-10 (B)). In Super Reach, when the final display mode of the item image A is the third display mode, the reliability of the cut-in notice effect is
For example, (probability that the item image A of the third display mode is finally displayed when the cut-in notice effect is executed in the super reach) × (probability that the cut-in notice effect is executed in the super reach) / { Probability that the item image A in the third display mode is finally displayed when the cut-in notice effect is executed in Super Reach) × (Probability that cut-in notice effect is executed in Super Reach) + (In Super Reach Probability that the item image A in the third display mode is finally displayed when the cut-in notice effect is not executed)
It is calculated by × (probability that the cut-in notice effect is not executed in Super Reach)}. When 42% of the set value 1 is used as the probability that the cut-in notice effect is executed in the super reach, the cut-in notice effect when the final display mode of the item image A is the third display mode in the super reach. The reliability is (50% x 42%) / {(5)
0% x 42%) + (10% x 58%)} = about 78%.

The final display mode of the item image A becomes the second display mode (level 2) when the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP3” is determined. Item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" at a rate of 30% when executing cut-in notice production
(FIG. 9-10 (A)), and when the cut-in notice effect is not executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a rate of 20% (FIG. 9-10 (B).
)). Therefore, when 42% of the set value 1 is used as the probability that the cut-in notice effect is executed in the super reach, the cut-in notice when the final display mode of the item image A is the second display mode in the super reach. The reliability of the production is (30% x 42%)
/ {(30% x 42%) + (20% x 58%)} = about 52%.

The final display mode of the item image A becomes the first display mode (level 1) when the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2” is determined. When executing the cut-in notice effect, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is performed at a rate of 20%.
(FIG. 9-10 (A)), and when the cut-in notice effect is not executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined at a rate of 60% (FIG. 9-10 (B).
)). Therefore, when 42% of the set value 1 is used as the probability that the cut-in notice effect is executed in the super reach, the cut-in notice when the final display mode of the item image A is the first display mode in the super reach. The reliability of the production is (20% x 42%)
/ {(20% x 42%) + (60% x 58%)} = about 19%.

(Reliability of suggestion of button notice effect for each display mode of item image C)
According to FIGS. 9-10 (E) and 9-10 (F), the final display mode of the item image C is the third display mode (level 3), which is the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4".
"Or" IGEGP5 "is determined. When executing the button notice effect, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" or "IGEGP" is performed at a rate of 70% in total.
5 ”is determined (FIG. 9-10 (E)), and when the button notice effect is not executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern“ IGEGP4 ”is determined at a rate of 5% (FIG. 9-10 (F)).
). The reliability of the button notice effect when the final display mode of the item image C in the super reach is the third display mode is, for example, (the item of the third display mode when the button notice effect is executed in the super reach). Probability that image C is finally displayed) × (Probability that button notice effect is executed in super reach) / {Item image C in the third display mode is finally displayed when button notice effect is executed in super reach. Probability displayed in) ×
(Probability that the button notice effect is executed in Super Reach) + (Probability that the item image C in the third display mode is finally displayed when the button notice effect is not executed in Super Reach) × (Button notice in Super Reach) Probability that the effect will not be executed)}. When 19% of the set value 1 is used as the probability that the button notice effect is executed in the super reach, the reliability of the button notice effect when the final display mode of the item image C in the super reach is the third display mode. Is (70% x 19%) / {(70)
% X 19%) + (5% x 81%)} = about 77%.

The final display mode of the item image C becomes the second display mode (level 2) when the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP3” is determined. When the button notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a rate of 15% (Fig. 9-10 (E)), and when the button notice effect is not executed, the item image effect is determined at a rate of 10%. The item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP3” is determined (FIG. 9-10 (F)). Therefore, when 19% of the set value 1 is used as the probability that the button notice effect is executed in the super reach, the final display mode of the item image C in the super reach is the second.
The reliability of the button notice effect in the display mode is (15% x 19%) / {(15% x 1).
9%) + (10% x 81%)} = about 26%.

The final display mode of the item image C becomes the first display mode (level 1) when the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined. When the button notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined at a rate of 10% (Fig. 9-10 (E)), and when the button notice effect is not executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined at a rate of 65%. The item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2” is determined (FIG. 9-10 (F)). Therefore, when 19% of the set value 1 is used as the probability that the button notice effect is executed in the super reach, the final display mode of the item image C in the super reach is the first.
The reliability of the button notice effect in the display mode is (10% x 19%) / {(10% x 1).
9%) + (65% x 81%)} = about 3.5%.

FIG. 9-11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating various timings. Specifically, FIG. 9-11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display timing of various item images, the execution timing of various notice effects, and the like in the variable display that becomes super reach.

In FIG. 9-11, T0 is the start timing during the variable display. T1 is the timing to develop into super reach.

T2 is the timing at which the item image A (see FIG. 9-9 (A)) of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed when the item image effect A is executed. When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is any of "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5", the item image A is displayed in the first display mode (level 1) in the T2.

T3 is the timing at which the item image B (see FIG. 9-9 (D)) of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed when the item image effect B is executed. When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is any of "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5", the item image B is displayed in the first display mode (level 1) in the T3.

T4 is the timing at which the item image C (see FIG. 9-9 (G)) of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed when the item image effect C is executed. When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is any of "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5", the item image C is displayed in the first display mode (level 1) in the T4.

T5 is the timing at which the item image D (see FIG. 9-9 (J)) of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed when the item image effect D is executed. When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is any of "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5", the item image D is displayed in the first display mode (level 1) in the T5.

T6 is the timing at which the item image A (see FIG. 9-9 (B)) of the second display mode (level 2) is displayed when the item image effect A is executed. For example, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP3" or "IGEGP4".
In the case of T6, the display mode of the item image effect A changes from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP2" or "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect A does not change in the T6 (first display mode (level 1)).
Will remain).

T7 is the timing at which the item image B (see FIG. 9-9 (E)) of the second display mode (level 2) is displayed when the item image effect B is executed. For example, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP3" or "IGEGP4".
In the case of T7, the display mode of the item image effect B changes from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP2" or "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect B does not change in the T7 (first display mode (level 1)).
Will remain).

T8 is the timing at which the item image C (see FIG. 9-9 (H)) of the second display mode (level 2) is displayed when the item image effect C is executed. For example, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP3" or "IGEGP4".
In the case of T8, the display mode of the item image effect C changes from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP2" or "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect C does not change in the T8 (first display mode (level 1)).
Will remain).

T9 is a timing at which the item image D (see FIG. 9-9 (K)) of the second display mode (level 2) is displayed when the item image effect D is executed. For example, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP3" or "IGEGP4".
In the case of T9, the display mode of the item image effect D changes from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP2" or "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect D does not change in the T8 (first display mode (level 1)).
Will remain).

T10 is the timing at which the item image A (see FIG. 9-9 (C)) of the third display mode (level 3) is displayed when the item image effect A is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect A in the T10 is from the second display mode (level 2) to the third display mode (level 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A changes to "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect A changes from the first display mode (level 1) to the third display mode (level) in the T10. It changes to 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP2", the display mode of the item image effect A does not change in the T10 (first display mode (level 1)).
Will remain). Further, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "I".
In the case of "GEGP3", the display mode of the item image effect A does not change in the T10 (the second display mode (level 2) remains).

T11 is the timing at which the item image B (see FIG. 9-9 (F)) of the third display mode (level 3) is displayed when the item image effect B is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect B in the T11 is from the second display mode (level 2) to the third display mode (level 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect B in the T11 is changed from the first display mode (level 1) to the third display mode (level). It changes to 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP2", the display mode of the item image effect B does not change in the T11 (first display mode (level 1)).
Will remain). Further, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "I".
In the case of "GEGP3", the display mode of the item image effect B does not change in the T11 (the second display mode (level 2) remains).

T12 is the timing at which the item image C (see FIG. 9-9 (I)) of the third display mode (level 3) is displayed when the item image effect C is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect C in the T12 is changed from the second display mode (level 2) to the third display mode (level 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect C in the T12 is changed from the first display mode (level 1) to the third display mode (level). It changes to 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP2", the display mode of the item image effect C does not change in the T12 (first display mode (level 1)).
Will remain). Further, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "I".
In the case of "GEGP3", the display mode of the item image effect C does not change in the T12 (the second display mode (level 2) remains).

T13 is the timing at which the item image D (see FIG. 9-9 (L)) of the third display mode (level 3) is displayed when the item image effect D is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP4", the display mode of the item image effect D in the T13 is from the second display mode (level 2) to the third display mode (level 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect D in the T13 is changed from the first display mode (level 1) to the third display mode (level). It changes to 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP2", the display mode of the item image effect D does not change in the T13 (first display mode (level 1)).
Will remain). Further, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "I".
In the case of "GEGP3", the display mode of the item image effect D does not change in the T13 (the second display mode (level 2) remains).

T14 is an erasure timing (timing used as an item) of the item image A. That is, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP.
If it is "2", the item image A of the first display mode (level 1) being displayed is deleted, and if the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP3", the displayed first item image A is deleted. 2 When the item image A of the display mode (level 2) is deleted and the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP4" or "IGEGP5", the third display mode (level 3) being displayed is displayed. Delete the item image A of.

Further, T14 is also a timing for starting the execution of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2). T15 is the timing at which the execution of the above-mentioned fanning effect is finished. That is, T14 to T15 are execution periods of the above-mentioned fanning effect.

Further, T15 is also a timing for starting execution of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2). T16 is a cut-in notice production (YEP-A1, YEP-A2)
It is the timing to end the execution of. That is, T15 to T16 are cut-in notice effects (
This is the execution period of YEP-A1 and YEP-A2).

T17 is the deletion timing of the item image B. That is, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP2", the item image B of the first display mode (level 1) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution of the item image effect B is executed. When the aspect pattern is "IGEGP3", the item image B of the second display aspect (level 2) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "I".
In the case of "GEGP4" or "IGEGP5", the item image B of the third display mode (level 3) being displayed is deleted.

In addition, T17 is also a timing to start the execution of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the group notice effect (YEP-B). T18 is the timing at which the execution of the above-mentioned fanning effect is finished.
That is, T17 to T18 are execution periods of the above-mentioned fanning effect.

Further, T18 is also a timing to start the execution of the group notice effect (YEP-B). T
19 is the timing at which the execution of the group notice effect (YEP-B) is finished. That is, T18
~ T19 is the execution period of the group notice production (YEP-B).

T20 is the deletion timing of the item image C. That is, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP2", the item image C of the first display mode (level 1) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution of the item image effect C is executed. When the aspect pattern is "IGEGP3", the item image C of the second display aspect (level 2) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "I".
In the case of "GEGP4" or "IGEGP5", the item image C of the third display mode (level 3) being displayed is deleted.

Further, T20 is also a timing to start the execution of the fanning effect for inciting whether to execute the button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2). T21 is the timing at which the execution of the above-mentioned fanning effect is finished. That is, T20 to T21 are execution periods of the above-mentioned fanning effect.

Further, T21 is also a timing to start execution of the button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2). T22 is a timing to end the execution of the button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2). That is, T21 to T22 are button notice effects (YEP-C1).
, YEP-C2) execution period.

T23 is the deletion timing of the item image D. That is, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP2", the item image D of the first display mode (level 1) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution of the item image effect D is executed. When the aspect pattern is "IGEGP3", the item image D of the second display aspect (level 2) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "I".
In the case of "GEGP4" or "IGEGP5", the item image D of the third display mode (level 3) being displayed is deleted.

In addition, T23 is also a timing to start the execution of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the character advance notice effect (YEP-D). T24 is a timing at which the execution of the above-mentioned fanning effect is finished. That is, T23 to T24 are execution periods of the above-mentioned fanning effect.

Further, T24 is also a timing for starting the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D).
T25 is the timing at which the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is finished. That is, T
24 to T25 are execution periods of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D).

9-12 and 9-13 are specific examples of various timings. In FIG. 9-12 (A), only the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1) is executed as the advance notice effect, and only the item image effect A (IGEP-A) is executed as the item image effect. When executed in "IGEGP4" (that is, item image production B (IGEP-B))
, Item image effect C (IGEP-C) and item image effect D (IGEP-D) are the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1"), item image A
It is explanatory drawing explaining the display timing, the execution timing of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), and the like.

In FIG. 9-12 (A), T2 to T6 are periods during which the item image A of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T6 to T10 are periods during which the item image A of the second display mode (level 2) is displayed. T10 to T14 are periods during which the item image A of the third display mode (level 3) is displayed. T14 to T15 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the cut-in notice effect. T15 to T16 are cut-in notice production (Y
The execution period of EP-A1), that is, the weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI (FIG. 9).
-5 (see)) is the displayed period.

In FIG. 9-12 (B), nothing is executed as the advance notice effect, and the item image effect A (IGEP-A), the item image effect C (IGEP-C), and the item image effect D (IGEP) are used as the item image effect. Item image A, in the case where each of −D) is executed by the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2” (when the item image effect B (IGEP-B) is the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1”), It is explanatory drawing explaining the display timing of the item image C, the item image D, and the like.

In FIG. 9-12 (B), T2 to T14 are periods during which the item image A of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T14 to T15 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the cut-in notice effect. In addition, the cut-in notice effect is not executed after the fanning effect. T4 to T20 are periods during which the item image C of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T20 to T21 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the button notice effect. In addition, the button notice effect is not executed after the fanning effect. T5 to T23 are periods during which the item image D of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T23 ~ T
24 is an execution period of the fanning effect that incites whether or not to execute the character advance notice effect. It should be noted that the character advance notice effect is not executed after the fanning effect.

In FIG. 9-13 (A), a cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), a group notice effect (YEP-B), and a button notice effect (YEP-C1) are executed as the advance notice effects, and the item image effect is an item. Each of the image effect A (IGEP-A) and the item image effect B (IGEP-B) is executed by the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3", and the item image effect C (IGEP-C) is the item image effect execution mode pattern. Executed with "IGEGP4"
Item image production D (IGEP-D) is the item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP"
Item image A, item image B, item image C, item image D display timing, cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), group advance notice effect (Y) when executed in "2"
It is explanatory drawing explaining the execution timing of EP-B) and the button notice effect (YEP-C1).

In FIG. 9-13 (A), T14 to T15 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the cut-in notice effect. The item image A is erased in T14, but the display mode of the item image A immediately before being erased is the second display mode (level 2). T15 to T16
Is the execution period of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), that is, the weak cut-in image 02.
This is the period during which 7SHYKE-JCI (see FIG. 9-5 (A)) is displayed. T17 ~ T
Reference numeral 18 denotes an execution period of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the group notice effect. Item image B is T
The display mode of the item image B, which is erased in 17, but immediately before being erased, is the second display mode (level 2). T18 to T19 are execution periods of the group notice effect (YEP-B), that is, a period during which the group image 027SHYKE-GN (see FIG. 9-5 (C)) is displayed. T20 to T21 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the button notice effect. The item image C is erased at T20, but the display mode of the item image C immediately before being erased is the third display mode (level 3). T21 to T22 are button notice effects (YEP-C)
Execution period of 1), that is, button image 027SHYKE-BU (see FIG. 9-6 (A)).
Is displayed (when the push button 31B is operated while the button image 027SHYKE-BU is displayed, the weak cut-in image 027S is used instead of the button image 027SHYKE-BU.
This is the HYKE-JCI (see FIG. 9-6 (B)) period. T23 to T24 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether or not to execute the character advance notice effect. Item image D is T23
However, the display mode of the item image D immediately before being erased is the first display mode (level 1). It should be noted that the character advance notice effect is not executed after the fanning effect.

In FIG. 9-13 (B), the button notice effect (YEP-C2) and the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) are executed as the advance notice effects, and the item image effect C (IGEP) is executed as the item image effect.
-C) is executed in the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" (that is, item image effect A (IGEP-A), item image effect B (IGEP-B), and item image effect D (IGEP-D). ) Is the item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP
1 ”), the display timing of the item image C, the character advance notice production (YEP-
It is explanatory drawing explaining the execution timing and the like of D).

In FIG. 9-13 (B), T4 to T12 are periods during which the item image C of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T12 to T20 are periods during which the item image C of the third display mode (level 3) is displayed. T20 to T21 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the button notice effect. T21 to T22 are button notice effects (YEP-C2)
) Is displayed, that is, the button image 027SHYKE-BU (see FIG. 9-6 (C)) is displayed (when the push button 31B is operated while the button image 027SHYKE-BU is displayed, the button image 027SHYKE-) is displayed. Strong cut-in image 027SH instead of BU
This is the YKE-KCI (see FIG. 9-6 (D)) period. T24 to T25 are
It is an execution period of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D), that is, a period during which the movable body 027SH32 is operated (see FIGS. 9-6 (E) to 9-6 (G)). In the example of FIG. 9-13 (B), there is neither a display of the item image D suggesting whether the character advance notice effect is executed nor an execution of the fanning effect to incite whether to execute the character advance notice effect. An item notice effect (YEP-D) is being executed. Specifically, when the character advance notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "
When "IGEGP1" is determined (see FIG. 9-10 (G)), the display of the item image D suggesting whether or not the character advance notice effect is executed is also a fan effect that incites whether or not the character advance notice effect is executed. The character advance notice production (YEP-D) will be executed without execution.

9-14 and 9-15 show the effect determination process (effect determination process for determining the advance notice effect, item image effect, etc.) executed in the variable display start setting process of S171 in the effect control process process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example. The flowchart of FIG. 9-15 is a continuation of the flowchart of FIG. 9-14.

In the effect determination process shown in FIGS. 9-14, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 027SHS100). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), if the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach (either fluctuation pattern # 13 or # 14), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution is performed at a rate of 40%. However, if the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot (either fluctuation pattern # 17 or # 18), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 50%, and the fluctuation pattern is other than the above (variation patterns # 10, # 11, # 12). , # 15, # 16), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027SHS100, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cut-in notice effect is determined to be executed (step 027SHS101). When it is decided that the cut-in notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS101; YES),
Step 027 Proceed to SHS102. If it is not determined that the cut-in notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS101; NO), the process proceeds to step 027SHS105.

Following step 027SHS101 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of cut-in advance notice effect (that is, the advance notice effect pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern (step 027SHS102). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), a CPU for effect control.
In 120, if the fluctuation pattern is out of the super reach, the notice production pattern "YEP-"
"A1" is determined at 80%, and the notice production pattern "YEP-A2" is determined at 20%. Further, if the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" at 20% and sets the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" to 80.
Determined by%.

Following step 027SHS102, the effect control CPU 120 is set in step 027S.
Notice production pattern of cut-in notice production determined by HS102 (Notice production pattern "Y"
Set EP-A1 or notice effect pattern "YEP-A2") (step 027SHS)
103).

Following step 027SHS103, the effect control CPU 120 determines an execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect A (IGEP-A) as a case of executing the cut-in notice effect (step 027SHS104). For example, Figure 9-
As shown in 10 (A), the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1” to 0% and the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2” to 20.
%, Item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is 30%, Item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is 50%, Item image effect execution mode pattern "IGE"
"GP5" is determined at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027SHS101 (NO), the effect control CPU 120 executes the item image effect A (IGEP-A) as a case where the cut-in notice effect is not executed.
The item image effect execution mode pattern) is determined (step 027SHS105). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (B), the effect control CPU 120 has 10% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1” and the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEG”.
The ratio of "P2" is 60%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is 20%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is 10%, and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" is 0%.

Following step 027SHS104 or step 027SHS105, the effect control C
The PU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A (IGEP-A) determined in step 027SHS104 or step 027SHS105 (step 027SHS106).

Following step 027SHS106, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the group notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 027SHS110). For example, FIG.
As shown in -7 (C), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution presence at a rate of 20% if the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach, and 50% if the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot. If the fluctuation pattern is other than the above, the execution presence is determined at the ratio of 0%.

Following step 027SHS110, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the group advance notice effect is determined to be executed (step 027SHS111). If it is determined that the group notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS111; YES), step 027S
Proceed to HS113. If it is not determined that the cut-in notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS111; NO), the process proceeds to step 027SHS115.

Following step 027SHS111, the effect control CPU 120 sets the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-B" for the group advance notice effect (step 027SHS113).

Following step 027SHS113, the effect control CPU 120 determines an execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) as a case of executing the group notice effect (step 027SHS114). For example, FIG. 9-10 (C
), The effect control CPU 120 uses the item image effect execution mode pattern “IG”.
EGP1 "is 0%, item image effect execution mode pattern" IGEGP2 "is 20%, item image effect execution mode pattern" IGEGP3 "is 30%, item image effect execution mode pattern" IGEGP4 "is 45%, and item image effect execution mode is 45%. Pattern "IGEGP5"
Is determined at a rate of 5%.

Following step 027SHS111 (NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) as a case where the group notice effect is not executed (step 027SHS115). ). For example, FIG.
As shown in -10 (D), the effect control CPU 120 has 10% of the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1", 60% of the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2", and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3". 20%, item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" 10%, item image production execution mode pattern "I"
"GEGP5" is determined at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027SHS114 or step 027SHS115, the effect control C
The PU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) determined in step 027SHS114 or step 027SHS115 (step 027SHS116).

Following step 027SHS116, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the button notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 027SHS120). For example
As shown in FIG. 9-7 (D), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution presence at a rate of 10% if the fluctuation pattern is out of the super reach, and executes execution if the fluctuation pattern is the super reach jackpot. Determined at a rate of 50%, and if the fluctuation pattern is other than the above, 0% with execution
Determined by the ratio of.

Following step 027SHS120, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the button advance effect is executed (step 027SHS121). If it is determined that the button notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS121; YES), the process proceeds to step 027SHS122. If it is not determined that the button notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS121; NO), the process proceeds to step 027SHS125.

Following step 027SHS121 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of button advance notice effect (that is, the advance notice effect pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern (step 027SHS122). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (E), the effect control CPU 12
0 is the advance notice production pattern "YEP-C1" if the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach.
Is determined at 90%, and the notice production pattern "YEP-C2" is determined at 10%. Further, if the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" at 10% and determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C2" at 90%.

Following step 027SHS122, the effect control CPU 120 is set in step 027S.
Notice production pattern of button notice production decided in HS122 (Notice production pattern "YEP"
-C1 or advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C2") is set (step 027SHS12)
3).

Following step 027SHS123, the effect control CPU 120 determines an execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) as a case of executing the button notice effect (step 027SHS124). For example, FIG. 9-10
As shown in (E), the effect control CPU 120 uses the item image effect execution mode pattern “
5% for "IGEGP1", 10% for the item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP2",
Item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is 15%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is 60%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP"
5 ”is determined at a rate of 10%.

Following step 027SHS121 (NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) as a case where the button advance notice effect is not executed (step 027SHS125). ). For example
As shown in FIG. 9-10 (F), the effect control CPU 120 has 20% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1” and the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2”.
65%, item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" 10%, item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" 5%, item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP4"
"IGEGP5" is determined at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027SHS124 or step 027SHS125, C for effect control
The PU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) determined in step 027SHS124 or step 027SHS125 (step 027SHS126).

Following step 027SHS126, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the accessory advance notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 027SHS130). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (F), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute if the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach at a rate of 5%, and executes if the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot. Yes is determined at a rate of 75%, and if the fluctuation pattern is other than the above, execution Yes is determined at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027SHS130, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the character advance notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS131). If it is determined that the character advance notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS131; YES), step 02
Proceed to 7SHS133. When it is not decided that there is execution for the character advance notice production (step 0)
27SHS131; NO), the process proceeds to step 027SHS135.

Following step 027SHS131, the effect control CPU 120 sets the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-D" of the accessory advance notice effect (step 027SHS133).

Following step 027SHS133, the effect control CPU 120 determines an execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) as a case of executing the character advance notice effect (step 027SHS134). For example, FIG. 9-10 (
As shown in G), the effect control CPU 120 uses the item image effect execution mode pattern “I.
GEGP1 ”is 10%, item image effect execution mode pattern“ IGEGP2 ”is 5%, item image effect execution mode pattern“ IGEGP3 ”is 15%, item image effect execution mode pattern“ IGEGP4 ”is 60%, item image effect execution mode Pattern "IGEGP5
Is determined at a rate of 10%.

Following step 027SHS131 (NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines an execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) as a case where the character advance notice effect is not executed (step). 027SHS135). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (H), the effect control CPU 120 has 20% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1” and the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2”.
74%, item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" 4%, item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" 2%, item image production execution mode pattern "IG"
"EGP5" is determined at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027SHS134 or step 027SHS135, C for effect control
The PU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B (IGEP-D) determined in step 027SHS134 or step 027SHS135 (step 027SHS136). Then, this flowchart ends.

9-16 to 9-20 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation related to the feature unit 027SH. Specifically, FIGS. 9-16 to 9-20 show the main scenes in the example shown in FIG. 9-12 (A) as an example, and FIG. 9-16 (A) → FIG. 9-16 (B) → Fig. 9-16 (C)
) → Fig. 9-17 (A) → Fig. 9-17 (B) → Fig. 9-17 (C) → Fig. 9-18 (A) → Fig. 9
-18 (B) → Fig. 9-18 (C) → Fig. 9-19 (A) → Fig. 9-19 (B) → Fig. 9-19 (
The transition is in the order of C) → FIG. 9-20 (A) → FIG. 9-20 (B) → FIG. 9-20 (C).

FIG. 9-16 (A) is a scene of reaching in the variable display. FIG. 9-16 (B)
Is a scene developed into super reach (Scene of T1 in FIG. 9-11). Figure 9-16 (C
) Is the opening scene of the super reach production (the scene immediately after T1 in FIG. 9-11).

FIG. 9-17 (A) shows a scene in which the item image display suggestion effect using the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI suggesting whether the item image A is displayed is performed (
9-11 and 9-12 (A) immediately before T2). That is, C for production control
The PU 120 executes an item image display suggestion effect using the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI that suggests whether the item image A is displayed immediately before the display timing (T2) of the item image A. The effect control CPU 120 also executes an item image display suggestion effect that suggests whether each item image is displayed immediately before the display timing of another item image such as the item image B.

9-17 (B) shows a scene (FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12) in which the execution of the item image effect A is started (that is, the display of the item image 027SHIGALV1 in the first display mode (level 1) is started). (A) T2 scene).

Item image display suggestion display 027SH suggesting whether item image A is displayed.
Regarding the relationship between IGA-SHI and item image A, item image display suggestion display 027S
When HIGA-SHI is displayed, the item image A may be displayed or the item image A may not be displayed. Further, when the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is displayed, the item image A may always be displayed. Further, the item image A may be displayed when the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is not displayed. In addition, when the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is displayed, the item image display suggestion display 027
The item image A may be displayed more easily than when SHIGA-SHI is not displayed. In addition, there are a plurality of types of item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI, and the ratio of whether or not item image A is displayed depends on which type of item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is displayed. It may be different. Item image display suggestion display suggesting whether item image B is displayed 027SHIGB-SH
Relationship between I and item image B, item image display suggestion display suggesting whether item image C is displayed 027SHIGC-Relationship between SHI and item image C, item image display suggesting whether item image D is displayed The same applies to the relationship between the suggestion display 027SHIGD-SHI and the item image D.

9-17 (C) shows a scene in which the item image change suggestion effect using the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of the item image A changes is performed (FIGS. 9-11 and FIG. 9C). FIG. 9-12 (A), a scene immediately before T6). That is, the effect control CPU 120 has the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-H that suggests whether the display mode of the item image A changes immediately before the change timing (T6) of the item image A.
The item image change suggestion effect using EN is executed. The effect control CPU 120 is
Similarly, immediately before the change timing of another item image such as the item image B, the item image change suggestion effect suggesting whether the display mode of each item image changes is executed.

FIG. 9-18 (A) is a scene (the scene of T6 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12 (A)) in which the item image effect A is changed to the second display mode (level 2).

The item image change suggestion display 0 suggesting whether the display mode of the item image A changes.
Regarding the relationship between 27SHIGA-HEN and item image A, when the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN is displayed, the display mode of the item image A may change or the display mode of the item image A may not change. You may do so. Also,
When the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN is displayed, the display mode of the item image A may be changed at any time. In addition, item image change suggestion display 027S
The display mode of the item image A may change when HIGA-HEN is not displayed. Further, the display mode of the item image A may be changed more easily when the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN is displayed than when the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN is not displayed. Further, there are a plurality of types of the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN, and whether or not the display mode of the item image A changes depending on which type of the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN is displayed. The proportions may be different. Item image change suggestion display 027SHIGB-HEN and item image B suggesting whether the display mode of the item image B changes.
Item image change suggestion display suggesting whether the display mode of the item image C changes, the relationship between 027SHIGC-HEN and the item image C, and the item image change suggestion suggesting whether the display mode of the item image D changes. Display 027SHIGD-HEN and item image D
The same applies to the relationship with.

FIG. 9-18 (B) is an item image change suggestion display using 027SHIGA-HEN, which suggests whether the display mode of the item image A changes, as in the scene of FIG. 9-17 (C). Is the scene (the scene immediately before T10 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12 (A)). 9-18 (C) is a scene (the scene of T10 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12 (A)) in which the item image effect A is changed to the third display mode (level 3).

FIG. 9-19 (A) shows a cut-in notice effect (a notice effect corresponding to the item image A).
A scene in which the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI indicating that the fanning effect that incites whether to execute YEP-A1 and YEP-A2) is executed (started) is displayed (FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12 (FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12). A) The scene immediately before T14). That is, the effect control CPU 120
Immediately before the execution start timing (T14) of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the cut-in notice effect, the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is displayed. The effect control CPU 1
20 also displays a fanning effect start display indicating that each fanning effect is executed (started) immediately before the execution start timing of the fanning effect that fuels whether to execute another notice effect such as a group notice effect. indicate.

9-19 (B) to 9-20 (B) show a scene (FIG. 9) in which a fanning effect 027SHIGA-AO is performed to incite whether to execute a cut-in notice effect, which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image A (FIG. 9). 9-11 and T14 to T15 in FIG. 9-12 (A)). Figure 9-19 (
In the example of B) to 9-20 (B), the execution start timing (T14) of the cut-in notice effect
A countdown fan display that counts down to 027SHIGA-AO is used to produce a fan. That is, the effect control CPU 120 executes a fanning effect for inciting whether to execute the cut-in notice effect immediately before the execution start timing (T14) of the cut-in notice effect. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 also executes a fanning effect that encourages whether or not to execute each notice effect immediately before the execution start timing of other notice effects such as the group notice effect.

FIG. 9-20 (C) shows a cut-in notice effect (a notice effect corresponding to the item image A).
The scene where YEP-A1) is performed, that is, the weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JC
Scenes where I is displayed (scenes T15 to T16 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12 (A))
Is.

It should be noted that there are a fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI indicating that a fanning effect is executed to indicate whether to execute a cut-in notice effect which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image A, and a notice effect corresponding to the item image A. Regarding the relationship with the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the cut-in notice effect, when the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is displayed,
There may be a case where the fanning effect is executed and a case where the fanning effect is not executed. Also,
When the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is displayed, the fanning effect may always be executed. In addition, when the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is not displayed, the fanning effect may be executed. In addition, the fanning production start display 027SH
It may be easier to execute the fanning effect when the IGA-KAI is displayed than when the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is not displayed. In addition, the fanning production start display 0
There are multiple types of 27SHIGA-KAI, and any type of fanning effect start display 027S
Depending on whether HIGA-KAI is displayed, the ratio of whether or not to execute the fanning effect may be different. The fanning effect start display 027SHIGB-KAI indicating that the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the group notice effect that is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image B, and the group notice effect that is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image B The relationship with the fanning effect that incites whether to execute, the button that is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image C. Image C
The relationship with the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the button advancement effect corresponding to the item image D, and the fact that the instigating effect that incites whether to execute the character advance notice effect that corresponds to the item image D is executed. The same applies to the relationship between the fanning effect start display 027SHIGD-KAI shown and the fanning effect for inciting whether to execute the character advance notice effect which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image D.

In addition, regarding the relationship between the cut-in notice effect, which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image A, and the cut-in notice effect, which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image A, the fan effect was executed. In some cases, the cut-in notice effect may be executed and the cut-in notice effect may not be executed (see FIG. 9-12 (B)). In addition, the cut-in notice effect may be executed whenever the fanning effect is executed.
In addition, the cut-in notice effect may be executed when the fanning effect is not executed. In addition, it may be easier to execute the cut-in notice effect when the fanning effect is executed than when the fanning effect is not executed. In addition, there are a plurality of types of fanning effects, and the ratio of whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect may be different depending on which type of fanning effect is executed. The relationship between the fanning effect that encourages whether to execute the group notice effect that corresponds to the item image B and the group notice effect that corresponds to the item image B, and the notice effect that corresponds to the item image C. The relationship between the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the button advance notice effect and the button advance notice effect that corresponds to the item image C, and whether to execute the character advance notice effect that is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image D. The same applies to the relationship between the fanning effect and the character advance notice effect, which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image D.

9-21 to 9-30 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation related to the feature unit 027SH. Specifically, FIGS. 9-21 to 9-30 show the main scenes in the example shown in FIG. 9-13 (A) as an example, and FIG. 9-21 (A) → FIG. 9-21 (B) → Fig. 9-21 (C)
) → Fig. 9-22 (A) → Fig. 9-22 (B) → Fig. 9-22 (C) → Fig. 9-23 (A) → Fig. 9
-23 (B) → Fig. 9-23 (C) →, ..., Fig. 9-29 (A) → Fig. 9-29 (B) → Fig. 9-
The transition is in the order of 29 (C) → FIG. 9-30 (A) → FIG. 9-30 (B) → FIG. 9-30 (C).

FIG. 9-21 (A) shows a scene in which the item image display suggestion effect using the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI suggesting whether the item image A is displayed is performed (
The scene immediately before T2 in FIG. 9-11). FIG. 9-21 (B) shows a scene in which the execution of the item image effect A is started (that is, the display of the item image 027SHIGALV1 in the first display mode (level 1) is started) (the scene of T2 in FIG. 9-11). Is.

FIG. 9-21 (C) shows a scene in which the item image display suggestion effect using the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGB-SHI suggesting whether the item image B is displayed is performed (
It is a scene immediately before T3 of FIG. 9-11). 9-22 (A) shows a scene in which the execution of the item image effect B is started (that is, the display of the item image 027SHIGBLV1 in the first display mode (level 1) is started) (the scene of T3 in FIG. 9-11). Is.

FIG. 9-22 (B) shows a scene in which the item image display suggestion effect using the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGC-SHI suggesting whether the item image C is displayed is performed (
(Scene immediately before T4 in FIG. 9-11). FIG. 9-22 (C) shows a scene in which the execution of the item image effect C is started (that is, the display of the item image 027SHIGCLV1 in the first display mode (level 1) is started) (the scene of T4 in FIG. 9-11). Is.

FIG. 9-23 (A) shows a scene in which the item image display suggestion effect using the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGD-SHI suggesting whether the item image D is displayed is performed (
(Scene immediately before T5 in FIG. 9-11). 9-23 (B) shows a scene in which the execution of the item image effect D is started (that is, the display of the item image 027SHIGDLV1 in the first display mode (level 1) is started) (the scene of T5 in FIG. 9-11). Is.

FIG. 9-23 (C) shows a scene in which the item image change suggestion effect using the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of the item image A changes is performed (FIG. 9-11). The scene just before T6). FIG. 9-24 (A) is a scene (the scene of T6 in FIG. 9-11) in which the item image effect A is changed to the second display mode (level 2).

FIG. 9-24 (B) shows a scene in which the item image change suggestion effect using the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGB-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of the item image B changes is performed (FIG. 9-11). The scene just before T7). FIG. 9-24 (C) is a scene (the scene of T7 in FIG. 9-11) in which the item image effect B is changed to the second display mode (level 2).

FIG. 9-25 (A) shows a scene in which the item image change suggestion effect using the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGC-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of the item image C changes is performed (FIG. 9-11). The scene just before T8). FIG. 9-25 (B) is a scene (the scene of T8 in FIG. 9-11) in which the item image effect C is changed to the second display mode (level 2).

FIG. 9-25 (C) shows a scene in which the item image change suggestion effect using the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGD-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of the item image D changes is performed (FIG. 9-11). The scene just before T9). 9-26 (A) is a scene (the scene of T9 in FIG. 9-11) in which the item image effect D did not change.

FIG. 9-26 (B) shows a scene in which the item image change suggestion effect using the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGD-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of the item image D changes is performed (FIG. 9-11). The scene just before T13). 9-26 (C) is a scene in which the item image effect D has not changed (the scene of T13 in FIG. 9-11). The item image effect C is changed to the third display mode (level 3) in the scene before the scene of 9-26 (C) (the scene of T12 in FIG. 9-11).

FIG. 9-27 (A) shows a cut-in notice effect (a notice effect corresponding to the item image A).
A scene in which the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI indicating that the fanning effect that incites whether to execute (YEP-A1 and YEP-A2) is executed (started) is displayed (FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13 (FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13). A) The scene immediately before T14).

FIG. 9-27 (B) shows a scene (FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13) in which the fanning effect 027SHIGA-AO is performed to incite whether to execute the cut-in notice effect which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image A. (A) scenes T14 to T15). FIG. 9-27 (C) shows a scene in which the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image A, is performed, that is, a scene in which the weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI is displayed. (Fig. 9-1
1 and scenes T15 to T16 of FIG. 9-13 (A)).

FIG. 9-28 (A) shows a group notice effect (YEP-) which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image B.
B) A fan effect start display 02 indicating that a fan effect is executed (started)
A scene displaying 7SHIGB-KAI (T17 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13 (A))
The scene just before).

FIG. 9-28 (B) shows a scene (FIGS. 9-11 and 9-) in which the fanning effect 027SHIGB-AO is performed to incite whether to execute the group warning effect, which is the warning effect corresponding to the item image B.
13 (A), scenes T17 to T18). FIG. 9-28 (C) shows a scene in which a group notice effect, which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image B, is performed, that is, the group image 027SHYKE
-GN is displayed (scenes T18 to T19 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13 (A)).

FIG. 9-29 (A) shows a button notice effect (YE) which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image C.
A scene (FIGS. 9-11 and 9) in which the fanning effect start display 027SHIGC-KAI indicating that the fanning effect that incites whether to execute PC1 and YEP-C2) is executed (started) is displayed.
-13 (A), the scene immediately before T20).

9-29 (B) shows a scene (FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13 (FIGS. 9-11) and 9-13 (FIGS. 9-11) and 9-13 (FIGS. 9-11) and 9-13 (FIG. 9-11) and FIG. A) scenes from T20 to T21). 9-29 (C) to 9-30 (A)
Is a scene in which the button advance notice effect (YEP-C1), which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image C, is performed, that is, the button image 027SHYKE-BU is displayed, and the push button 3 is displayed.
As an example after the operation of 1B, a scene in which a weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI is displayed (scenes T21 to T22 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13 (A)).

FIG. 9-30 (B) shows a character advance notice effect (YEP) which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image D.
-D) is executed. The fanning effect start display 0 indicating that the fanning effect is executed (started).
Scene displaying 27SHIGD-KAI (T2 in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-13 (A))
(Scene just before 3).

FIG. 9-30 (C) shows a scene (FIGS. 9-11 and 9) in which the fanning effect 027SHIGD-AO is performed to incite whether to execute the character advance notice effect which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image D.
-13 (A), scenes T23 to T24). In addition, after the fanning effect, the character advance notice effect, which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image D, is not performed (see FIG. 9-13 (A)).

In the examples of FIGS. 9-16 to 9-30, each item image display suggestion display (027SHIGA-SHI, 027SHIGB-SHI, 027) suggesting the display of each item image.
SHIGC-SHI, 027SHIGD-SHI) are common, but they may be different for each item image. In addition, each of the notice productions will be fueled (027SHIGA-AO,
027SHIGB-AO, 027SHIGC-AO, 027SHIGD-AO) are common, but they may be different for each notice effect (that is, for each item image). Fan production start display (027SHIGA-KAI, 0) indicating the start of each fan production corresponding to each notice production
27SHIGB-KAI, 027SHIGC-KAI, 027SHIGD-KAI) are common, but they may be different depending on which of the advance notice effects is to be started (that is, for each item image).

(Suggested setting value)
Subsequently, the suggestion of the set value (see FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2) will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH suggests a set value currently set by using the item image effect (for example, using the item image). For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH is shown in FIGS. 9-31 (A) and 9-31 (B).
As shown in the above, a display mode of the fourth display mode (level 4) is provided as a display mode of the item image D in the item image effect D, and is currently set in relation to displaying the item image D of the fourth display mode. It may be suggested that the set value is set.

(First example)
For example, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (C), when the item image D in the fourth display mode is displayed → the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed (the movable body 027SH32 is in operation). In addition (regardless of the result of hit or miss), it may be suggested that the currently set value is set high (for example, the set value is 4 or more).

(Second example)
For example, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (D), it is currently set when the item image D in the fourth display mode is displayed → the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed → off. It may be suggested that the set value is a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more).

(Third example)
For example, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (E), when the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is not performed (the movable body 027SH32 is not operated). (
(Any result of hit or miss), it may be suggested that the currently set value is set high (for example, set value 4 or more).

(Fourth example)
For example, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (F), when the item image D in the fourth display mode is displayed → the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is not executed → is out of order, the current setting is set. It may be suggested that the set value is a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more).

(Fifth example)
Further, although not shown, it is currently set when the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode is changed to off (regardless of whether or not the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed). It may be suggested that the set value is a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more).
(Display timing of the fourth display mode (level 4))

In the first example (the same may apply to each of the second to fourth examples), the display timing of the item image D in the fourth display mode is not particularly limited (that is, it is displayed from the beginning). It may be displayed differently from other display modes), but as an example, the display period may be lengthened so as to be easily recognized by the player. Specifically, FIG. 9-32 (A)
) As shown as the item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP6", first (
The item image D of the fourth display mode may be displayed from T5) of FIG. 9-11. In addition, FIG. 9-
In 32 (A), the fourth display mode is generally gold to make the player recognize that the hit is fixed or rich, but there is a possibility that the item image D in the fourth display mode will be out of alignment. If it is not zero (for example, in the case of the second example, etc.), the fourth display mode may be a color or pattern different from gold.

(An example of the determination ratio of the first example)
In the case of the first example, as the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) in the case of executing the character advance notice effect (YEP-D).
Instead of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-10 (G), the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 9-32 (B) is used, and the item image effect is produced when the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is not executed. FIG. 9-1 shows the determination ratio of the item image production execution mode pattern of D (IGEP-D).
Instead of the determination ratio shown in 0 (H), the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 9-32 (C) may be used. That is, the effect control CPU 120 is in step 027SH of FIG. 9-15.
When the process of S134 is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern is determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 9-32 (B), and in step 027SHS135 of FIG. 9-15, FIG. 9-32 (
The item image effect execution mode pattern may be determined at the ratio shown in C).

That is, there is no case where the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is not performed (see FIG. 9-32 (C)), but the item image in the fourth display mode. Display of D → Execution of character advance notice effect (YEP-D) may occur (movement of movable body 027SH32 is present) (see FIG. 9-32 (B)), and an item image of the fourth display mode. There is a setting difference in the transition from the display of D to the execution of the character notice effect (YEP-D) (Fig. 9).
See −32 (B)). In the example shown in FIG. 9-32 (B), the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" is 1 when the current set value is any of the set values 1 to 3.
It is determined at a rate of%, and when the current set value is any of the set values 4 to 6, it is determined at a rate of 15%.

According to the example shown in FIG. 9-32 (B), it is the case of the set value 1-3 that the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed. There are more cases where the set value is 4-6 than. That is, according to the example shown in FIG. 9-32 (B), a low setting (for example, a set value 3)
Compared to the case of (below), when the setting is high (for example, the set value is 4 or more), the item image D in the fourth display mode is displayed → the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed. The frequency of doing it increases. Therefore, the transition (or frequent transition) of the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is high with respect to the currently set value. It suggests that it is a setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more).

The example shown in FIG. 9-32 (B) is Super Reach A (variation patterns # 13, # 1).
Whether it is 7) or Super Reach B (variation patterns # 14, # 18), the item image production execution mode pattern "IGE" is executed when the character effect is executed.
"GP6" can be determined (if it is any of the set values 1 to 3, it is determined at a rate of 1%, and if it is any of the set values 4 to 6, it is determined at a rate of 15%. However, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" may be determined only when the character effect is executed in the case of Super Reach B (when the character effect is Super Reach A). When executed, the item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP6"
May not be determined). That is, in the case of Super Reach B, the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is possible (movable body 02).
There is a setting difference in the transition to 7SH32 operation), while in the case of Super Reach A, the display of the item image D in the 4th display mode → the character advance notice effect (YEP-
There may be no setting difference between the transition of D) with execution (with operation of the movable body 027SH32).

(An example of the determination ratio of the second example)
In the case of the second example, for example, the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) (the movement of the movable body 027SH32 is present) → the jackpot. Although there is no setting difference in, the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the character advance notice effect (YEP-D)
) Is executed (movable body 027SH32 is operated) → off, there may be a setting difference. For example, the setting value 1 is the determination ratio of the item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" when the character effect is executed in the case of a super reach jackpot.
While it is common to ~ 6 (for example, 20%), the determination ratio of the item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" when the character effect is executed when the super reach is lost is set to the case of the set values 1 to 3. The values may be different from those of the values 4 to 6 (for example, the set values 1 to 3).
If it is any of the above, it may be 1%, and if it is any of the set values 4 to 6, it may be 10%).

In the case of Super Reach B, the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode →
There is a setting difference in the transition from the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) (the movement of the movable body 027SH32) to the deviation, while the fourth display mode is in the case of Super Reach A. Display of item image D → Execution of character notice production (YEP-D) Yes (movable body 02)
There may be no setting difference in the transition of 7SH32 with operation) → off.

(An example of the determination ratio of the third example)
In the case of the third example, for example, there is no setting difference in the transition from the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode to the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D), but the fourth example. There may be a setting difference in the transition from the display of the item image D in the display mode to the non-execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D). For example, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" is set to be common to the set values 1 to 6 (for example, 10%) when the character effect is executed, while the item image effect is not executed when the character effect is not executed. The determination ratio of the execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" may be different between the cases of the set values 1 to 3 and the cases of the set values 4 to 6 (for example, the set value 1).
If it is any of ~ 3, it may be 0.5%, and if it is any of the set values 4 to 6, it may be 3%).

(An example of the determination ratio of the fourth example)
In the case of the fourth example, for example, there is no setting difference in the transition of the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → no execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) → big hit. There may be a setting difference in the transition of the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → no execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) → off. For example, Super Reach jackpot (variable pattern #
In 17 and # 18), the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" when the character effect is not executed is set to be common to the set values 1 to 6 (for example, 5%), while the super reach is lost (variation pattern # 13). , # 14), the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" when the accessory effect is not executed may be different between the case of the set value 1 to 3 and the case of the set value 4 to 6 (for example). If it is any of the set values 1 to 3, it may be 0.5%, and if it is any of the set values 4 to 6, it may be 3%).

(An example of the determination ratio of the fifth example)
In the case of the fifth example, the details are omitted, but for example, the item image D of the fourth display mode is used.
There is no setting difference in the transition of the display → big hit, but there may be a setting difference in the transition of the display → off of the item image D in the fourth display mode.

In the above, an example suggesting that the currently set value is set to a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more) has been described, but the target of the suggestion is not limited to the high setting. For example, the negation of the minimum setting (setting value 1) (setting value 2 or more) may be suggested, or each setting value of setting value 1 to setting value 6 may be suggested. That is, in the above, an example in which the determination ratios of the item image effect execution mode patterns are divided into two, the set values 1 to 3 and the set values 4 to 6, is described. For example, the set value 1 and the set value 2 are described. The item image effect execution mode pattern may be determined differently by dividing into 6 and the item image effect execution mode pattern may be determined by dividing each of the set values 1 to 6 into 6 items. May be different.

(Regarding a modified example of the game machine related to the feature unit 027SH)
Subsequently, a modification of FIGS. 9-1 to 9-32 will be described.

(Modification example 1 of feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example has been described in which the order of the display start timing of each item image and the order of the execution start timing of each notice effect corresponding to each item image match. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 and the like, the display start timing of the item images A to D is the display start timing of the item image A (T2) → the display start timing of the item image B (T3).
) → Display start timing of item image C (T4) → Display start timing of item image D (T5), and the execution start timing of each notice effect corresponding to item images A to D is set to item image A. Execution start timing of the corresponding cut-in notice effect (T15)
→ Execution start timing of group notice effect corresponding to item image B (T18) → Execution start timing of button notice effect corresponding to item image C (T21) → Execution start of character notice effect corresponding to item image D Taimin ( The order is T24), and the order of the display start timing of each item image and the order of the execution start timing of each notice effect corresponding to each item image are the same. However, the order of the display start timing of each item image and the order of the execution start timing of each notice effect corresponding to each item image do not have to match. For example, the item image A → the item image B may be displayed in this order, and the group notice effect corresponding to the item image B → the cut-in notice effect corresponding to the item image A may be executed in this order. Further, when the item image A → the item image B are displayed in this order, the cut-in notice effect → the group notice effect may be executed in the order, or the group notice effect → the cut-in notice effect may be executed in the order. You may do so.

(Modification example 2 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which the display start timing of each item image is different is described. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 and the like, the item image A is T1, the item image B is T2, and so on.
The item image C is T3, and the item image D is T4. However, the display start timing of each item image does not have to be different individually. For example, item images A to D 4
Two types of item images may be displayed at the same time, three types of item images may be displayed at the same time, or four types of item images may be displayed at the same time. The display start timings of all of the above may be the same.

(Modification example 3 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which the change timing of each item image to the second display mode (level 2) is different is described. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 and the like, the item image A is T6.
, Item image B is T7, item image C is T8, and item image D is T9. However, the timing of changing each item image to the second display mode (level 2) does not have to be different individually. For example, the timing of changing to the second display mode (level 2) of two types of the four types of item images A to D may be simultaneous, or three types of the four types of item images. The timing of changing to the second display mode (level 2) may be the same, or the timing of changing all four types of item images to the second display mode (level 2) may be simultaneous. The same applies to the timing of change to the third display mode (level 3).

(Modification example 4 of feature portion 027SH)
In the example shown in FIGS. 9-11 and the like, the display mode at the start of displaying the item image A is always the first display mode (level 1), but the display mode at the time of display disclosure is the second display mode (level 1). 2) or the third display mode (level 3) may be used. The same applies to the item image B, the item image C, and the item image D. As described above, when the item image D may be in the fourth display mode (level 4), the display mode at the time of display disclosure may be the fourth display mode (level 4).

(Variation example 5 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which the display mode of the item image does not change at the timing after any of the notice effects is executed (that is, at the change timing when the display mode of the item image changes, any of the notice effects is executed. An example) that is earlier than the above was explained. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 9-11, none of the item images changes at the timing after the earliest executed cut-in notice effect is executed (after T15). However, the display mode of the item image may be changed at the timing after any of the advance notice effects is executed.

(Variation example 6 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which the item image is not newly displayed at the timing after one of the notice effects is executed (that is, the display start timing of the item image is earlier than the timing when any of the notice effects is executed. Example) was explained. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 9-11, no item image is newly displayed at the timing after the earliest executed cut-in notice effect is executed (after T15). However, the item image may be newly displayed at the timing after any of the advance notice effects is executed.

(Modification example 7 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which the execution periods of a certain advance notice effect and another advance notice effect do not overlap has been described, but the execution periods of a certain advance notice effect and another advance notice effect may overlap. That is, the execution start timing of a certain advance notice effect → the execution start timing of another advance notice effect → the execution end timing of another advance notice effect → the execution end timing of a certain advance notice effect, or the execution start timing of a certain advance notice effect → another The execution start timing of the notice effect → the execution end timing of a certain notice effect → the execution end timing of another notice effect may be set.

(Modification example 8 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image and the notice production are one-to-one, such as the item image A and the cut-in notice effect, the item image B and the group notice effect, the item image C and the button notice effect, and the item image D and the character notice effect. An example of correspondence was explained. That is, as shown in FIG. 9-11, it is the cut-in notice effect that can be executed based on the item image A being deleted (used as an item), and the item image B is deleted. It is a group notice effect that can be executed based on, and it is a button notice effect that can be executed based on the item image C being deleted, and it can be executed based on the item image D being deleted. Explained that it was a notice production of the character. However, the item image and the advance notice effect do not necessarily have to be in a one-to-one correspondence relationship.

For example, a plurality of advance notice effects (for example, item image X) for a certain item image (for example, item image X).
For example, a cut-in notice effect, a group notice effect) may be associated with each other. When the item image X is associated with the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect, only the cut-in notice effect is executed based on the deletion of the item image X, and the item image X is executed. In some cases, only the group notice effect is executed based on the fact that is deleted. It should be noted that the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect may be executed based on the erasure of the item image X.

Further, for example, one notice effect (for example, cut-in notice effect) may be associated with a plurality of item images (for example, item image X and item image Y). When the cut-in notice effect is associated with the item image X and the item image Y, the cut-in notice effect is executed based on the deletion of the item image X, and the case where the cut-in notice effect is executed.
The cut-in notice effect may be executed based on the fact that the item image Y is deleted. In addition to the display mode of the item image when it is erased, the rate at which the advance notice effect is executed may be different depending on the type of the item image to be erased. In the above example, in addition to the display mode of the item image X and the item image Y when deleted, the cut-in notice effect is executed according to whether the item image X is deleted or the item image Y is deleted. You may make different proportions.

Further, for example, a plurality of notice effects (for example, cut-in notice effect, group notice effect) may be associated with a plurality of item images (for example, item image X and item image Y). When the item image X and the item image Y are associated with the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect, only the cut-in notice effect is executed based on the deletion of the item image X. , When only the group notice effect is executed based on the deletion of the item image X, when only the cut-in notice effect is executed based on the deletion of the item image Y, and when the item image Y is executed. In some cases, only the group notice effect is executed based on the fact that it is erased. In addition, when the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are executed based on the erasure of the item image X, or the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are executed based on the erasure of the item image Y. It may be executed. In addition to the display mode of the item image when it is erased, the ratio of the advance notice effect to be executed and the ratio of the type of the advance notice effect to be executed may be different depending on the type of the item image to be deleted. Good.

(Modification example 9 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above description, the item image can specify the notice effect having a corresponding relationship at the time of the start of display, but the item image may not be able to specify the notice effect having a corresponding relationship at the time of the start of display. For example, the item image A corresponding to the cut-in notice effect is displayed in a display mode (for example, plain) in which the corresponding notice effect cannot be specified at the display start timing, and the corresponding notice effect is displayed at the change timing. May be changed from an unspecified display mode (for example, plain) to a identifiable display mode (first display mode, second display mode, etc.) for the corresponding advance notice effect.

(Modification example 10 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which a plurality of item images of the same type are not displayed has been described, but a plurality of item images of the same type may be displayed. For example, when two item images A of the first display mode (level 1) are displayed side by side, or the item image A of the first display mode (level 1) and the item image A of the second display mode (level 2) are displayed side by side. And may be displayed side by side. When N items of a certain type are displayed, the advance notice effect corresponding to the item images is executed up to N times.

(Modification example 11 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, the display mode of the item image changes, but the type of the item image does not change. However, the type of the item image may also change. For example, the first display mode (level 1)
) Is changed to the item image B of the first display mode (level 1), or the item image A of the first display mode (level 1) is the item image of the second display mode (level 2). It may change to B. The display mode is demoted (level 3 → level 2) when the type is changed such that the item image A of the third display mode (level 3) changes to the item image B of the second display mode (level 2). There may be cases.

(Modification example 12 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, there are four types of notice effects, and there are also four types of item images corresponding to the notice effects, but the item images and the notice effects do not have to be four types. For example, in relation to the above-described modification 8, the item image may be 2 types and the notice effect may be 5 types, the item image may be 5 types, and the notice effect may be 2 types. In addition, one type of item image and one type of notice effect may be used.

(Modification example 13 of feature unit 027SH)
In the above, an example has been described in which the timing of erasing the item image is the timing of executing the fanning effect for inciting the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image, but the timing of erasing the item image is not limited to this. For example, the timing to delete the item image is
It may be the timing when the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image is executed. In other words
The item image may be continuously displayed during the execution period of the fanning effect and deleted at the start of execution of the advance notice effect (at the end of the fanning effect). Specifically, in FIG. 9-11, the item image A is erased to T15 instead of T14, the item image B is erased to T18 instead of T17, and the item image C is erased to T21 instead of T20. The item image D may be deleted in T24 instead of T23.

(Modification example 14 of feature portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image A is erased at the start of the fanning effect (T14 in FIG. 9-11), and during the execution period of the fanning effect (T14 to T15 in FIG. 9-11) and during the cut-in notice effect (T14 in FIG. 9-11). An example that is not displayed in T15 to T16 of FIGS. 9-11 (in the case of the above-mentioned modification 13, it is erased at the start of the cut-in notice effect (T15), and is deleted during the cut-in notice effect period (FIG. 9-11). T1
An example) not displayed in 5 to T16) has been described. That is, an example has been described in which the item image A is erased by the start of the cut-in notice effect at the latest and is not displayed during the cut-in notice effect. However, the item image A may be displayed during the cut-in notice effect without being erased. That is, the item image A may not be erased even if it is used. The same applies to other item images (item image B, item image C, item image D).

(Variation example 15 of the feature portion 027SH)
In relation to the above-described modification 14, when the used item image A is not erased, it may be possible to recognize that the used item image A has been used. For example, if the display mode of the item image A immediately before the start of the fanning effect for fanning the cut-in notice effect is the second display mode (level 2) (the first display mode (level 1) or the third display mode (level 1)). 3)), at the start of the fanning effect that fuels the cut-in notice effect, the second display mode (level 2) → the fanning effect execution mode (for example, the color is grayed down or monochrome, and the wording "fanning effect is in progress". , Etc.), and at the start of the cut-in notice effect, the fanning effect execution mode → the advance notice effect execution mode (for example, the color is grayed down or monochrome, and the wording “notice effect in progress” is displayed). , At the end of the cut-in advance notice effect, the advance notice effect execution mode → the advance notice effect end mode (for example, the color is grayed down or monochrome, and the word “finished” or the like is displayed). That is, for the item image A, during the execution period of the fanning effect (T14 ~
T15) is defined as the "fanning effect execution mode", and during the execution period of the cut-in notice effect (T15 to T1).
6) may be set as a "notice effect execution mode", and after the end of the cut-in notice effect (T16 ~) may be set as a "notice effect end mode". The same applies to other item images (item image B, item image C, item image D).

If the cut-in notice effect is not executed after the fanning effect, at the execution start timing of the cut-in notice effect, the fanning effect execution mode → the notice effect non-execution mode (for example, the color is grayed down or monochrome, and the wording "notice" A mode in which "directing non-execution" or the like is displayed) may be used. That is, with respect to the item image A, the “fanning effect execution mode” may be set during the execution period (T14 to T15) of the fanning effect, and the “notice effect non-execution mode” may be set after the end of the fanning effect (T15 to). The same applies to other item images (item image B, item image C, item image D).

The above-mentioned fanning effect execution mode may be common regardless of the type of the item image. For example, it may be plain, and the wording "in the process of fanning" or the like may be displayed. The advance notice effect execution mode, the advance notice effect end mode, and the advance notice effect non-execution mode may be common regardless of the type of the item image.

In addition, instead of the above, the fanning effect execution mode may be one according to the type of the item image. For example, the color may be grayed down or the wording "in the process of fanning" or the like may be displayed within a range in which a pattern (see FIG. 9-9) corresponding to the type of the item image can be recognized. The advance notice effect execution mode, the advance notice effect end mode, and the advance notice effect non-execution mode may be common regardless of the type of the item image.

(Modification example 16 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example of executing the notice effect after executing the fan effect (an example of executing the fan effect before executing the notice effect) has been described, but it is not necessary to execute the notice effect after executing the fan effect (notice effect). You don't have to perform the fanning effect before executing). That is, after the item image is used, the advance notice effect may be executed without executing the fanning effect.

(Modification example 17 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image effect (display of the item image) and the notice effect are executed during the super reach effect, but the item image effect and the advance notice effect may be executed during another period. For example, the flow may be variable display start → item image A display start → reach → item image A deletion → cut-in notice effect execution, or variable display start → item image A display start → reach → super reach. → Delete item image A → Execute cut-in notice effect, or start variable display → Reach → Start display item image A → Delete item image A → Execute cut-in notice effect, The flow may be as follows: variable display start → reach → display start of item image A → development into super reach → deletion of item image A → execution of cut-in notice effect.

(Modification example 18 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image effect (display of the item image) and the notice effect are executed during one variation, but the item image effect and the advance notice effect may be executed over a plurality of variations.

For example, it is necessary to display all the necessary item images (item images for which display is determined) in one fluctuation, and delete all the displayed item images in the other fluctuation after the next fluctuation. It is also possible to execute all the notice effects (notice effects for which execution is decided). For example, the item image A, the item image B, and the item image C are displayed on the first change → the item image A, during the change after some changes (for example, during any change from the second change to the fourth change). The flow is that the item image B and the item image C are all erased (each item image can be changed between the start of display and the deletion) and the necessary advance notice effect is executed.

Further, for example, all necessary item images (item images for which display presence is determined) are displayed during a certain fluctuation, and the displayed item images are sequentially deleted over a plurality of fluctuations to produce a necessary notice (a notice effect). The advance notice effect for which execution is determined) may be sequentially executed. For example
Item image A, item image B, and item image C are displayed on the first variation, and item image A is deleted on the first variation (item image A can be changed between display start and deletion). Execute (cut-in notice effect) → Delete item image B on the 2nd change (item image B can change between display start and erase) and execute the necessary notice effect (group notice effect) → 3rd change The flow of erasing the item image C (the item image C can be changed between the start of display and the erasure) and executing the necessary notice effect (button notice effect), and the item image A, item image B, and item in the first change. Start displaying image C → Delete item image A on the 2nd change (item image A can change between display start and erase) and execute the necessary notice effect (cut-in notice effect) → Item image on the 3rd change Erase B (item image B can be changed between display start and erase) and execute the necessary notice effect (group notice effect) → Delete item image C at the 4th change (item image C is between display start and erase) It is a flow of executing the necessary notice effect (button notice effect).

Further, for example, in one other fluctuation in which necessary item images (item images for which display presence is determined) are sequentially displayed over a plurality of fluctuations and all necessary item images have been displayed.
You may delete all the displayed item images and execute all the necessary notice effects (notice effects for which execution is determined). For example, the item image A is started to be displayed on the first variation → the item image B is displayed on the second variation → the item image C is started to be displayed on the third variation.
The flow of erasing all the item image A, item image B, and item image C in the variable eye (each item image can be changed between the start of display and erasing) and executing the necessary notice effect, and the item in the first variable eye. Start displaying image A → Start displaying item image B on the 2nd change → Start displaying item image C on the 3rd change → Erase all item image A, item image B, and item image C on the 4th change (each item image Can be changed between the start of display and erasure) and the necessary notice effect is executed.

Further, for example, necessary item images (item images for which display presence is determined) are sequentially displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and the displayed item images are sequentially deleted over a plurality of fluctuations to provide a necessary notice. The production (notice production for which execution is determined) may be sequentially executed. For example
It is necessary to start displaying the item image A on the first change → start displaying the item image B on the second change and delete the item image A on the second change (the item image A can change between the start of display and the deletion). A notice effect (cut-in notice effect) is executed, and the item image B is erased at the third variation (the item image B can be changed between the start of display and the deletion), and the necessary notice effect (group notice effect).
For example, the item image A is displayed on the first variation → the item image B is displayed on the second variation → the item image A is deleted on the third variation (the item image A is displayed between the display start and the deletion). Execute the necessary notice effect (cut-in notice effect) and delete the item image B at the 4th change (item image B can be changed between the start of display and erasure) and the necessary notice effect (can be changed to) It is a flow to execute the group notice production).

(Variation example 19 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image is determined in the variable display start setting process (step S171) (see FIGS. 7 and 9-14), but the item image is determined in the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161). May be good. Variable display start setting process (step S17
In the mode of determining the item image in 1), the item image is determined based on whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 9-10), but in the pre-reading advance notice setting process (step S161). When determining the item image in the above, the item image may be determined based on the contents of the received symbol designation command (see FIG. 8-16) and the variable category designation command (see FIG. 8-16). It should be noted that a plurality of item images may be collectively determined in the look-ahead notice setting process at the time of one start winning, or one item image may be determined in the look-ahead notice setting process at the time of each start winning. ..
That is, a plurality of item images may be associated with one variation, or one item image may be associated with each variation.

(Modification example 20 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, as an effect when the item image is used after the item image is displayed, an example of executing a notice effect corresponding to the type of the item image to be used has been described. However, the notice effect corresponding to the type of the item image to be used has been described. There may be a case where a different kind of advance notice effect is executed. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 9-11, the cut-in notice effect can be executed based on the erasure of the item image A, but the group notice effect is based on the erasure of the item image A. May be executed. Further, as an example related to the modified example 8,
Based on the fact that the item image X is deleted when a plurality of notice effects (for example, cut-in notice effect, group notice effect) are associated with a certain item image (for example, item image X). A notice effect (for example, a character advance notice effect) different from the above-mentioned plurality of advance notice effects (for example, cut-in notice effect, group notice effect) may be executed. As a result, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest. In addition, in a mode in which a notice effect different from the notice effect corresponding to the type of the item image to be used may be executed, a notice effect different from the notice effect corresponding to the type of the item image to be used is executed. The jackpot expectation may be higher in the case than in the case of executing the advance notice effect corresponding to the type of the item image to be used.

(Modification example 21 of the feature portion 027SH)
Although the suggestion of the set value has been described with reference to FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, the suggestion of the set value is not limited to this.

For example, in relation to the above-mentioned modification 1, the determination ratio of whether or not to match the order of the display start timing of each item image and the order of the execution start timing of each notice effect corresponding to each item image is set. A setting difference may be provided to suggest a set value in relation to whether the order of the display start timing of the item image and the order of the execution start timing of the advance notice effect match. As an example, the ratio of matching the order of the display start timing of the item image and the order of the execution start timing of the advance notice effect is set to 95% when the setting is low (for example, 3 or less).
When the setting is high (for example, 4 or more), it is set to 85%, and the order of the display start timing of the item image and the order of the execution start timing of the advance notice effect do not match (or often do not match). It may be suggested that the setting is high (for example, the set value is 4 or more). In other words, the frequency of breaking the above order rules (in principle, the order is the same) is higher in the high setting (5% in the low setting, 15% in the high setting), so the high setting is made due to the breaking of the law (frequency of breaking the law). It may be suggested.

Further, in relation to the above-described modification 2, a setting difference is provided in the determination ratio of whether or not the display start timings of the plurality of item images are simultaneous, and it is related to whether the display start timings of the plurality of item images are simultaneous. However, the set value may be suggested. As an example, the ratio of displaying start timings of a plurality of item images at the same time is set to 5% when the setting is low (for example, 3 or less) and 15% when the setting is high (for example, 4 or more). , It may be suggested that the fact that the change timings of the plurality of item images match (or the frequency of matching is high) is a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more). In other words, the frequency of breaking the above display start timing rule (the principle is not simultaneous) is higher in the high setting (5% in the low setting, 15% in the high setting), so it is higher due to the breaking of the law (frequency of breaking the rule). It may suggest a setting. Similarly, in relation to the above-mentioned modification 3, a setting difference is provided in the determination ratio of whether or not the change timings of the plurality of item images are simultaneous, and whether the change timings of the plurality of item images are simultaneous. It may be related and suggest a setting value.

Further, in relation to the above-described modification 4, a setting difference is provided in the determination ratio of the display mode at the time of display disclosure of the item image, and the set value is suggested in relation to the display mode at the time of display disclosure of the item image. May be good. As an example, the display mode at the start of displaying the item image is the first display mode (level 1) or the second display mode (level 2), and the ratio of the second display mode (level 2) is set low (for example,). If it is 3 or less), it is set to 3%, if it is set to a high setting (for example, 4 or more), it is set to 9%, and the display mode at the start of displaying the item image is the second display mode (level 2). It may be suggested that (or the frequency of the second display mode (level 2) is high) is a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more). In other words, the frequency of breaking the law regarding the display mode when displaying and disclosing the item image (in principle, the first display mode (level 1)) is higher in the high setting (3% in the low setting, 9% in the high setting). High setting may be suggested by breaking the law (frequency of breaking the law).

Further, the set value may be suggested in the advance notice effect. For example, for a strong cut-in image (Fig. 9-5 (B), etc.), a normal strong cut-in image (appearance of characters A, B, etc.) and a special strong cut-in image (appearance of characters A, C, etc.) By preparing two types of strong cut-in images and providing a setting difference in the determination ratio of the types of the strong cut-in images, the set value may be suggested in the strong cut-in image. Specifically, for example, after deciding to execute the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2) for displaying the strong cut-in image, if the setting is low (for example, 3 or less), "normal strong cut-in image" Is determined at a rate of 95%, and "special strong cut-in image" is determined at a rate of 5%. If the setting is high (for example, 4 or more),
The "normal strong cut-in image" may be determined at a rate of 80%, and the "special strong cut-in image" may be determined at a rate of 20%. That is, a cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2) that displays a strong cut-in image.
), The "special strong cut-in image" is displayed (or the "special strong cut-in image" is frequently displayed) is a high setting (for example, a setting value of 4 or more). May be suggested.

Further, for example, for a group image (FIG. 9-5 (C), etc.), two types of group images, a normal group image (character A group) and a special group image (character B group), are prepared, and the group image is prepared. By providing a setting difference in the determination ratio of the type of, the set value may be suggested in the group image. Specifically, for example, after deciding to execute the group notice effect (YEP-B), when the setting is low (for example, 3 or less), 95% of the "normal group image" and the "special group image" are used. Is determined at a rate of 5%, and when the setting is high (for example, 4 or more), the "normal group image" is 80%.
A "special group image" may be determined at a rate of 20%. That is, in the group notice effect (YEP-B) for displaying the group image, it is set high that the "special group image" is displayed (or the "special group image" is frequently displayed). It may be suggested that the value is (for example, a set value of 4 or more).

In addition, the set value may be suggested in the super reach. For example, for Super Reach B (variable patterns # 16 and # 18), normal super reach production (battle production in background 1 etc.), special super reach production (battle production in background 2 etc.)
By preparing two types of super reach effects, and setting a difference in the determination ratio of the type of super reach effects of super reach B, the set value may be suggested in the super reach effects of super reach B. .. In addition, it may be related to the jackpot and suggest a set value. For example, regarding the start effect (fanfare effect) of the big hit game state of the third big hit (see Fig. 9-2), there are two types: normal fanfare effect and special fanfare effect.
By preparing different types of fanfare effects and setting a difference in the determination ratio of the types of fanfare effects in the third jackpot, in the fanfare effects in the third jackpot,
The set value may be suggested.

Further, it may be suggested by the item image that the setting value is suggested later. For example, the item image may suggest that the set value is suggested in the advance notice effect. As an example, when it is decided to display a "special strong cut-in image" in which a setting value is suggested, and a cut-in notice effect is performed, the setting value is suggested in the cut-in notice effect. (Eg, the wording "
Notice with setting suggestion? The item image A may be displayed. That is, in the item image A of the above aspect, it is uncertain whether or not the cut-in notice effect is performed, but if the cut-in notice effect is performed, the "special strong cut-in image" is used in the cut-in notice effect. Is suggested to be displayed. As another example, when it is decided to display a "special strong cut-in image" in which the setting value is suggested, the mode suggesting that the setting value is suggested in the cut-in notice effect ( For example, the item image A may be displayed (a mode in which the wording "notice with setting suggestion!" Is displayed). That is, the item image A of the above aspect suggests that the cut-in notice effect is performed and that the "special strong cut-in image" is displayed in the cut-in notice effect.

It should be noted that the advance notice effect shown in FIG. 9-4 has a set value in a different effect (may be an effect related to the jackpot reliability, or may be an effect not related to the jackpot reliability). The item image may suggest that the suggestion is made.

Further, it may be suggested by a method other than the item image that the setting value is suggested later. In other words, the item image may not suggest that the setting value is suggested later. For example, it may be suggested that the setting value is suggested in the advance notice effect by the fanning effect of the advance notice effect. As an example, when it is decided to display a "special strong cut-in image" in which a setting value is suggested, and a cut-in notice effect is performed, the setting value is suggested in the cut-in notice effect. (For example, a mode in which a word such as "notice with setting suggestion?" Is displayed in the vicinity of the number to be counted down) may be executed. That is, it is uncertain whether or not the cut-in notice effect will be performed in the fanning effect of the above aspect, but if the cut-in notice effect is performed, the "special strong cut-in image" in the cut-in notice effect. It is suggested to display. As another example, when it is decided to display a "special strong cut-in image" in which the setting value is suggested, the mode suggesting that the setting value is suggested in the cut-in notice effect ( For example, a fanning effect of (a mode in which a word such as "notice with setting suggestion!" Is displayed near the number to be counted down) may be executed. That is, the fanning effect of the above aspect suggests that the cut-in notice effect is performed and that the "special strong cut-in image" is displayed in the cut-in notice effect.

It should be noted that the suggestion of the set value may not be suggested at all later. In other words
The set value may be suggested without any suggestion in advance (without suggesting even the item image or suggesting other than the item image.

In addition, "suggestion of setting value" is only to recognize that there is a high possibility that it is a certain setting value (or a setting value within a certain range), and that it is a certain setting value (or a setting value within a certain range). It may not be deterministically notified, or it may be deterministically notified that it is a certain set value (or a set value within a certain range). For example, by making sure that a certain effect or a certain display is not determined when the setting is low (for example, a setting value of 3 or less), the effect or the display or the like is set to a high setting (for example, a setting value of 4 or less). It will definitely notify you of the fact.

(Application to other devices)
In the above, an example of applying to a pachinko gaming machine has been described, but it can also be applied to a slot machine. For example, in a certain state (for example, a state that is not an advantageous state), whether to shift to another state (for example, an advantageous state) periodically (for each fixed number of games, for each number of games within a predetermined range) is determined from the normal time. In the slot machine that draws with high probability, during the high probability period that visits periodically,
It is possible to execute multiple types of advance notice effects with different expectations for transition to another state, and in the period before the high probability period, item images that can specify the type of advance notice effect to be executed are displayed. After making it displayable, the rate at which the notice effect of the type specified by the item image is executed after the item image is displayed may be different depending on the display mode of the item image.

Alternatively, in the slot machine that draws with high probability whether to shift to the second advantageous state (for example, AT state, ART state, etc.) in the first advantageous state (for example, CZ, bonus game, etc.), the first Second period of favorable condition (for example, the latter half of the period of the first advantageous state ~
In the final period), it is possible to execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects having different expectations for transition to the second advantageous state, and in the first period prior to the second period of the first advantageous state, After making it possible to display an item image that can specify the type of advance notice effect to be executed, the type of advance notice effect specified by the item image is executed after the item image is displayed depending on the display mode of the item image. The proportions may be different.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 027SH)
(Means 1 relating to feature unit 027SH)
A gaming machine capable of performing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.) and provided with an effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing an effect, the effect executing means , Within a predetermined period (for example, T15 to T16, T18 to T1 shown in FIGS. 9-11).
9, T21 to T22, T24 to T25, the period before the lottery period with high probability, etc.)
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects (for example, a plurality of types of advance notice effects shown in FIG. 9-4), and a specific display (for example, FIG. 9-) that can specify the type of the advance notice effect to be executed. 9
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, the item image effect shown in FIG. 9-8 (A)) in which a plurality of types of item images shown in (A) to (L) are displayed before the predetermined period. Therefore, the rate at which the content advantageous to the player is notified differs depending on the type of the advance notice effect executed within the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-7 (A) to (F)). There are cases where the notice effect of the type specified by the specific display is executed after the specific display is displayed, and cases where the notice effect is not executed (for example, FIG. 9-10 (A). ) (C)
(E) When the item image effect execution mode patterns "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5" for displaying the item image are determined in the case of executing the advance notice effect of (G), the item image is specified by the item image after the item image is displayed. Various types of notice effects are executed, and Fig. 9-10
(B) (D) (F) (H) When the item image is displayed when the advance notice effect is not executed, when the item image effect execution mode patterns "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5" are determined, after the item image is displayed. The type of advance notice effect specified by the item image is not executed), there are a plurality of display modes of the specific display (see, for example, FIGS. 9-9 (A) to (L)), and the display mode of the specific display is used. After the specific display is displayed, the rate at which the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display is executed is different (for example, FIGS. 9-8 (B), 9-10 (A) to FIG.
As shown in (H), the rate at which the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image is executed after the item image is displayed differs depending on the display mode of the item image. Specifically, the rate at which the notice effect is executed is such that the display mode of the item image corresponding to the notice effect is the third display mode (level 3)> the display mode of the item image corresponding to the notice effect is the second display. Aspect (level 2)> The display mode of the item image corresponding to the notice effect is the first display mode (level 1)).

According to the game machine, the ratio of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display is executed after the specific display is displayed differs depending on the display mode of the specific display. Therefore, the player pays attention to the display mode of the specific display. The interest of the game is improved.

(Means 2 pertaining to feature unit 027SH)
In the game machine of the above means 1, the specific display changes to a special mode corresponding to the execution period of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display (for example, the type of advance notice effect specified by the specific display). Possible (for example, for item image A, when the cut-in notice effect is executed (T1)
5) can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode"), and the special mode of the specific display is common regardless of the type of the specific display (for example, common regardless of the type of the item image). You may.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to clearly notify that the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display is being executed (the item image is used). In addition, it is possible to clearly notify which specific display corresponds to the advance notice effect being executed and which specific display corresponds to the advance notice effect being executed.

(Means 3 for Feature 027SH)
In the gaming machines of means 1 and means 2, the specific display can be changed to a special mode after the execution of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display (for example, the notice effect of the type specified by the specific display). (For example, for item image A, at the end of execution of the cut-in notice effect (T)
16) may be changed to "preliminary effect end mode").

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to clearly notify that the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display has been executed (the item image has been used). In addition, it is possible to clearly notify which specific display corresponds to the executed notice effect and which specific display corresponds to the executed advance notice effect.

(Means 4 for Feature 027SH)
In the game machine of the means 1 to the above means 3, as the specific effect, a plurality of types of the specific display can be displayed within a specific period prior to the predetermined period (for example, T shown in FIG. 9-11).
Up to four types of item images can be displayed in 2 to T14, etc.), and the specific display of each type may be displayed in any display mode (for example, in the scene of FIGS. 9-26 (C)). The item image A is displayed in the second display mode (level 2), and the item image B is the second display mode.
The item image C is displayed in the display mode (level 2), the item image C is displayed in the third display mode (level 3), and the item image D is displayed in the first display mode (level 1)).

According to the above-mentioned game machine, since attention is paid to the display mode of each type of specific display, the interest is improved.

(Means 5 for Feature 027SH)
The gaming machine of the above means 2 can execute the advance notice effect at a plurality of timings within the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11, T15, T18, T21, T24.
As such, the advance notice effect can be executed at a plurality of execution start timings), and the execution timing of the advance notice effect differs depending on the type of the advance notice effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-11, cut-in. The execution start timing of the advance notice effect is T15, the execution start timing of the group advance notice effect is T18, the execution start timing of the button advance notice effect is T21, the execution start timing of the character advance notice effect is T24, etc., depending on the type of advance notice effect) The timing at which the specific display becomes the special mode differs depending on the type of the notice effect corresponding to the specific display (for example, the notice effect specified by the specific display) (for example, the item image A is a cut-in notice). The item image B can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode" when the effect is executed (T15), and the item image B can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode" when the group notice effect is executed (T18).
The item image C can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode" when the button notice effect is executed (T21), and the item image D is changed to the "notice effect execution mode" when the character advance notice effect is executed (T24). Since it is possible, the timing at which the item image becomes the "notice effect execution mode" may differ depending on the type of the advance notice effect specified by the item image).

According to the above-mentioned game machine, since the execution timing of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display is different, the complexity of the effect can be reduced.

(Means 6 for Feature 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 5 are used when the specific display capable of specifying the type of the advance notice effect is displayed before the execution of the advance notice effect, and before the execution of the advance notice effect. There are cases where the specific display that can specify the type of effect is not displayed (for example, in the example of FIG. 9-13 (B), the item image B corresponding to the button advance effect is displayed before the button advance effect is executed. However, the item image D corresponding to the character advance notice effect is not displayed before the execution of the character advance notice effect), and the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the execution of the advance notice effect. The rate at which the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is not displayed before the execution of the advance notice effect is different from that in the case where the content advantageous to the player is notified, for example, FIG. 9-8 (Fig. 9-8). B), Fig. 9
As shown in -10 (A) to (H), when the item image corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed, and when the item image corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed. Since the execution rate of the advance notice effect is different from when it is not displayed, the item image corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed, and the item image corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed. When is not displayed, the jackpot expectation may be different as shown in FIGS. 9-7 (A) to 9-7 (F)).

According to the above-mentioned game machine, the interest is improved because attention is paid to what kind of production flow will be.

(Means 7 pertaining to feature unit 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 6 can change the display mode of the specific display after the display of the specific display (see, for example, FIG. 9-8), and an effect suggesting a change in the display mode of the specific display. (For example, the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN, which suggests whether the display mode of the item image A changes, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (C)) can be executed. You may.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, since attention is paid to whether the specific display changes, the interest is improved.

(Means 8 for Feature 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 7 can execute variable display of identification information, and a look-ahead determination means (for example, a CPU for effect control) that determines whether or not a content advantageous to the player is notified.
The look-ahead notice setting process (step S161) according to 120) is provided, and the predetermined period is a period corresponding to a plurality of variable displays, and the specific display may be displayed based on the look-ahead determination. Good. For example, a plurality of item images may be associated with one variable display, or one item image may be associated with each variable display.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, the degree of attention to the fluctuation to be executed later is increased, and the interest is improved.

(Means 9 for Feature 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 8 can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and include a disadvantage setting value and an advantageous setting value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. Any of the set values can be set (see, for example, FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B)), and at least a part of the plurality of types of the advance notice effect suggests the set value. You may. For example, for a strong cut-in image (Fig. 9-5 (B), etc.), a normal strong cut-in image (appearance of characters A, B, etc.) and a special strong cut-in image (appearance of characters A, C, etc.) By preparing two types of strong cut-in images and providing a setting difference in the determination ratio of the types of the strong cut-in images, the set value may be suggested in the strong cut-in image.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, in addition to paying attention to whether the advance notice effect is executed after the display of the specific display, whether or not there is a suggestion of a set value in the advance notice effect displayed after the display of the specific display improves the interest. ..

(Means 10 pertaining to feature unit 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 9 can be controlled to an advantageous state which is advantageous to the player, and include a disadvantage setting value and an advantageous setting value which is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. Any of the set values can be set (for example, see FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B)), the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value can be executed, and the specific display is , May be displayed in response to the setting suggestion effect to be executed.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, in addition to whether or not the advance notice effect is executed, attention is paid to the specific display regarding the suggestion of the set value, so that the interest is further improved. If there is no relationship between the item image effect that displays the item image corresponding to the notice effect before the execution of the notice effect and the setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value, there is a risk that the interest will be insufficient. In the above-mentioned game machine, the item image effect may suggest the execution of the setting suggestion effect, and since there is a relationship between the item image effect and the setting suggestion effect, the interest is improved.

(Means 11 for Feature 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 9 can be controlled to an advantageous state which is advantageous to the player, and include a disadvantage setting value and an advantageous setting value which is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. Any of the set values can be set (for example, see FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B)), the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value can be executed, and the specific display is , It may be displayed in response to the advance notice effect to be executed, but may not be displayed in response to the setting suggestion effect to be executed.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated and suppress the deterioration of the interest. Item image production that displays the item image corresponding to the notice production before the execution of the notice production, and
If the setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value is related, the effect may become complicated and the interest may be reduced. However, in the above game machine, the item image effect does not suggest the execution of the setting suggestion effect. Since the item image production and the setting suggestion production are independent of each other, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

(Means 12 pertaining to feature unit 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 9 can be controlled to an advantageous state which is advantageous to the player, and include a disadvantage setting value and an advantageous setting value which is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. Any of the set values can be set (see, for example, FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B)), and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value can be executed, and as the specific display. The setting suggestion effect may be executed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-31 and 9-32, the item image D (level 4) may be used to suggest the set value.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, in addition to whether or not the advance notice effect is executed, attention is paid to the specific display regarding the suggestion of the set value, so that the interest is further improved. If there is no relationship between the item image effect that displays the item image corresponding to the notice effect before the execution of the notice effect and the setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value, there is a risk that the interest will be insufficient. In the above-mentioned game machine, since the item image production is also a setting suggestion production, the interest is improved.

(Means 13 for Feature 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 9 can be controlled to an advantageous state which is advantageous to the player, and include a disadvantage setting value and an advantageous setting value which is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. Any of the set values can be set (for example, see FIGS. 9-2 (A) and 9-2 (B)), and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value can be executed. May be different from the advance notice effect and the specific display. For example, the set value may be suggested by the effect mode (for example, the background) of the super reach effect, or the set value may be suggested by the start effect (fanfare effect) of the jackpot game state.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated and suppress the deterioration of the interest. If the advance notice effect, the item image effect, and the setting suggestion effect are related, the effect may become complicated and the interest may be lowered. However, in the above-mentioned game machine, the advance notice effect, the item image effect, and the setting suggestion effect are produced. Because it is independent of, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

It is a game machine that can play games
Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production
The effect executing means can execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects within a predetermined period, and also executes a specific effect for displaying a specific display capable of specifying the type of the advance notice effect to be executed before the predetermined period. It is possible
The rate at which the content advantageous to the player is notified differs depending on the type of the advance notice effect executed within the predetermined period.
After the specific display is displayed, there are times when the advance notice effect of the type specified by the specific display is executed and times when it is not executed.
There are a plurality of display modes of the specific display.
A gaming machine characterized in that the rate at which the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display is executed after the specific display is displayed differs depending on the display mode of the specific display.

Images